|
User Manual
p
OTS
Optical Test System
10 Gb/s SONET/SDH test module
071-0855-05
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warranty
Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any such product proves defective during
this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either will repair the defective product without
charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect
before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance
of service. Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the
service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid. Tektronix shall pay for
the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which
Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping
charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for products returned to any other locations.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or
improper or inadequate maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service
under warranty a) to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix
representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair damage resulting from
improper user or connection to incompatible equipment; or c) to service a product that has been
modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration
increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN
LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS
VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR
OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY
PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX
AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER
TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Safety Summary............................................................................................v
Preface ....................................................................................................................... ix
Getting Started
Product Description...................................................................................................1-1
OTS9100 Features and Capabilities ........................................................................1-2
Accessories..............................................................................................................1-4
First Time Operation ..................................................................................................1-6
OTS9100 Installation................................................................................................1-6
Removing OTS Cards ..............................................................................................1-7
Slot Positioning of OTS Cards..................................................................................1-8
Module Interconnection ..........................................................................................1-10
Power On and Software Initialization......................................................................1-11
Module Quick Check ..............................................................................................1-12
Emergency Startup Disk.........................................................................................1-14
Shutdown and Power Off........................................................................................1-14
Operating Basics
Front Panel Indicators and Connectors ...................................................................2-1
10 Gb/s Transceiver Optics......................................................................................2-2
Receive Analysis ......................................................................................................2-5
Transmit Generation.................................................................................................2-7
Clock Trigger ............................................................................................................2-9
Software Interface Operating Basics......................................................................2-11
User Interface.........................................................................................................2-11
Elements of the User Interface...............................................................................2-12
Navigation Window.................................................................................................2-23
Setup Property Menus.......................................................................................2-25
Transmitter - Signal ......................................................................................2-26
Transmitter - Transport Overhead................................................................2-30
Transmitter - Path Overhead........................................................................2-34
Transmitter - Error Insertion .........................................................................2-37
Transmitter - K1, K2 Decode........................................................................2-40
Transmitter - IP Payload...............................................................................2-43
Transmitter - IP Error Insertion.....................................................................2-44
Receiver - Signal ..........................................................................................2-47
Receiver - Trace Mismatch...........................................................................2-50
Receiver - IP Setup.......................................................................................2-54
Setup Summary............................................................................................2-55
Signal Monitor Menus........................................................................................2-56
Receiver - Transport Overhead....................................................................2-56
Receiver - Path Overhead ............................................................................2-58
Receiver - K1, K2 Decode ............................................................................2-60
Receiver - Payload........................................................................................2-61
Test Control Menu.............................................................................................2-62
Test Control Summary..................................................................................2-64
OTS9100 User Manual
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Measurements Menu.........................................................................................2-65
Receiver - Real-Time....................................................................................2-65
Receiver - Cumulative ..................................................................................2-67
Receiver - History .........................................................................................2-69
Receiver – IP Measurements .......................................................................2-72
Transmitter - IP Measurements....................................................................2-73
Analysis Menu ...................................................................................................2-74
Analysis – SONET/T1M1..............................................................................2-74
Analysis – SDH/G.826..................................................................................2-76
APS Measurements Menu.................................................................................2-78
Remote Access Setups..........................................................................................2-81
Select Server..........................................................................................................2-82
View Options...........................................................................................................2-83
System View...........................................................................................................2-85
SCPI Output ...........................................................................................................2-86
Results Files...........................................................................................................2-87
Results File Management..................................................................................2-87
Results Viewer...................................................................................................2-89
OTS System Event Printer Application...................................................................2-99
Reference
Commands Overview.................................................................................................3-1
IEEE 488.2 System Commands...............................................................................3-1
Remote Control Setup and Format Commands.......................................................3-1
Remote Control Port Settings...................................................................................3-2
Remote Control Lockout...........................................................................................3-2
System Configuration Queries..................................................................................3-2
Save and Restore System Settings..........................................................................3-3
System File Management.........................................................................................3-3
System Signal Standard (OTS9100 module) ...........................................................3-3
Receiver Commands (OTS9100 module)................................................................3-3
Received Signal Measurement Commands (OTS9100 module) .............................3-4
Received Signal Analysis Commands (OTS9100 module)......................................3-5
Receiver Test Control (OTS9100 module)...............................................................3-5
Transmitter Commands (OTS9100 module)............................................................3-5
Syntax..........................................................................................................................3-6
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands ............................................................................3-6
SCPI Commands and Queries.................................................................................3-8
Parameter Types and Formats.................................................................................3-9
Optional and Alternative Parameters......................................................................3-10
Abbreviating Commands, Queries, and Parameters..............................................3-11
Controlling Responses to Queries..........................................................................3-11
Chaining Commands and Queries .........................................................................3-12
General Rules.........................................................................................................3-13
Slot Specifiers.........................................................................................................3-13
Command Description .............................................................................................3-14
*CLS .......................................................................................................................3-14
*ESE.......................................................................................................................3-14
*ESR.......................................................................................................................3-14
*IDN........................................................................................................................3-14
*LRN.......................................................................................................................3-14
*OPC ......................................................................................................................3-15
*RCL.......................................................................................................................3-15
*RST.......................................................................................................................3-15
*SAV.......................................................................................................................3-15
ii
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:MS................................................................................3-16
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:PATH............................................................................3-17
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:RS ................................................................................3-19
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:LINE...........................................................................3-19
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:PATH.........................................................................3-21
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:SECTion ....................................................................3-23
:SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:HPPLM ..........................................................................3-23
:SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:HPUNEQ .......................................................................3-24
:SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:LABEl:EXPEcted ...........................................................3-24
:SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted .........................................................3-24
:SENSe:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe......................................................................3-26
:SENSe:DATA:AUTOscan:STRUcture...................................................................3-27
:SENSe:DATA:CHANnel ........................................................................................3-28
:SENSe:DATA:IP:PAYLoad:PATTern ....................................................................3-28
:SENSe:DATA:IP:STReam:INDEX ........................................................................3-28
:SENSe:DATA:PATH:TRACe.................................................................................3-28
:SENSe:DATA:PAYLoad:PATTern.........................................................................3-29
:SENSe:DATA:POH ...............................................................................................3-30
:SENSe:DATA:POS:SCRambling ..........................................................................3-30
:SENSe:DATA:RATE..............................................................................................3-31
:SENSe:DATA:SECTion:TRACe............................................................................3-31
:SENSe:DATA:SPE:STUFfing................................................................................3-32
:SENSe:DATA:STRUcture .....................................................................................3-32
:SENSe:DATA:TOH................................................................................................3-32
:SENSe:INPUt:THREshold.....................................................................................3-33
:SENSe:MEASure:APSTime ..................................................................................3-33
:SENSe:MEASure:HDLC........................................................................................3-35
:SENSe:MEASure:IP:PACKets...............................................................................3-36
:SENSe:MEASure:LINE:CUMUlative .....................................................................3-36
:SENSe:MEASure:LINE:WINDow..........................................................................3-37
:SENSe:MEASure:PATH:CUMUlative....................................................................3-37
:SENSe:MEASure:PATH:WINDow ........................................................................3-38
:SENSe:MEASure:SECTion:CUMUlative...............................................................3-39
:SENSe:MEASure:SECTion:WINDow....................................................................3-39
:SENSe:MEASure:WINDow...................................................................................3-40
:SENSe:OPTical:INPUt:OVERload ........................................................................3-40
:SENSe:OPTical:THReshold:AUTO.......................................................................3-41
:SENSe:OVERhead:MONItor:CHANnel.................................................................3-41
:SENSe:SIGNal:STANdard ....................................................................................3-41
:SENSe:STATus:LEDS ..........................................................................................3-42
:SENSe:TEST.........................................................................................................3-44
:SENSe:TRIGger:MODE ........................................................................................3-45
:SOURce:CLOCk:SOURce ....................................................................................3-45
:SOURce:DATA:BACKground:STRUcture.............................................................3-45
:SOURce:DATA:CHANnel......................................................................................3-46
:SOURce:DATA:HDLC:IFRame:GAP ....................................................................3-46
:SOURce:DATA:IP:HEADer ...................................................................................3-46
:SOURce:DATA:IP:PAYLoad:PATTern..................................................................3-48
:SOURce:DATA:IP:STReam:INDEX......................................................................3-49
:SOURce:DATA:IP:TRAFfic ...................................................................................3-49
:SOURce:DATA:POS:SCRambling........................................................................3-49
:SOURce:DATA:OVERhead:PASSthru..................................................................3-49
:SOURce:DATA:PARIty:LOOP...............................................................................3-50
:SOURce:DATA:PATH:OVERhead:PASSthru .......................................................3-50
:SOURce:DATA:PATH:TRACe ..............................................................................3-51
OTS9100 User Manual
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
:SOURce:DATA:PAYLoad:BACKground:PATTern ................................................3-52
:SOURce:DATA:PAYLoad:PATTern ......................................................................3-53
:SOURce:DATA:POH.............................................................................................3-54
:SOURce:DATA:RATE...........................................................................................3-55
:SOURce:DATA:SECTion:TRACe .........................................................................3-55
:SOURce:DATA:SOURce.......................................................................................3-56
:SOURce:DATA:SPE:BACKground:STUFfing .......................................................3-56
:SOURce:DATA:SPE:STUFfing .............................................................................3-57
:SOURce:DATA:STRUcture...................................................................................3-57
:SOURce:DATA:TOH.............................................................................................3-57
:SOURce:INSErt:ANOMaly.....................................................................................3-58
:SOURce:INSErt:DEFEct .......................................................................................3-60
:SOURce:INSErt:IP:ANOMaly:MODE ....................................................................3-61
:SOURce:MEASure:HDLC .....................................................................................3-62
:SOURce:MEASure:IP:PACKets............................................................................3-63
:SOURce:OUTPut:LASER......................................................................................3-63
:SOURce:OUTPut:LASER:INFO............................................................................3-64
:SOURce:OUTPut:LASER:INTERlock ...................................................................3-64
:SOURce:SIGNal:STANdard..................................................................................3-64
:SOURce:TRIGger:MODE......................................................................................3-65
:STATus:PRESet....................................................................................................3-65
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB...............................................................................3-65
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork .......................................................................3-66
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:PORT .............................................................................3-67
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A ..............................................................3-68
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A ..............................................................3-72
:SYSTem:CONFig:MODule....................................................................................3-75
:SYSTem:CONFig:SLOTs......................................................................................3-76
:SYSTem:DESCription:SETUp...............................................................................3-76
:SYSTem:ERRor ....................................................................................................3-77
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts...........................................................................3-77
:SYSTem:FORMat:BLOCk.....................................................................................3-79
:SYSTem:HEADers ................................................................................................3-79
:SYSTem:LOCK:RELease......................................................................................3-80
:SYSTem:LOCK:REQuest......................................................................................3-80
:SYSTem:SIGNal:STANdard..................................................................................3-80
:SYSTem:VERBose................................................................................................3-81
*TST .......................................................................................................................3-81
Appendices
Specifications ............................................................................................................A-1
Optical Cards .............................................................................................................B-1
Emergency Startup Disk ...........................................................................................C-1
List of Acronyms........................................................................................................D-1
Installing the Software .............................................................................................. E-1
Module Card Replacement ....................................................................................... F-1
Illustrations of cabled OTS9100...............................................................................G-1
iv
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Safety Summary
Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or
any equipment connected to it.
To avoid potential hazards, use this product only as specified.
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
While using this product, you may need to access other parts of the system. Read the General
Safety Summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions related to operating the
system.
How to Avoid Fire or Personal Injury
Use Proper Power Cord. To avoid fire hazard, use only the power cord specified for this
product.
Use Proper Power Source. Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more
than the voltage specified.
Connect and Disconnect Properly. Do not connect or disconnect test leads while they are
connected to a voltage source.
Avoid Electric Overload. To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not apply a voltage to a
terminal that is outside the range specified for that terminal.
Ground the Product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power
cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground.
Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product, ensure that the
product is properly grounded.
Observe All Terminal Ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings and markings
on the product. Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making
connections to the product.
The common terminal is at ground potential. Do not connect the common terminal to elevated
voltages.
Do not apply a potential to any terminal, including the common terminal, that exceeds the
maximum rating of that terminal.
Use Proper AC Adapter. Use only the AC adapter specified for this product.
Do Not Look into the End of a Fibreglass Cable. Never look into the end of a fibreglass cable
or a single fibre which could be connected to a laser source. Laser radiation can damage your
eyes because it is invisible and your pupils do not contract instinctively as with normal bright
light. If you think your eyes have been exposed to laser radiation, you should have your eyes
checked immediately by an eye doctor. The optical output’s radiation power corresponds to the
laser class in accordance with IEC 825-1, 11.93.
Use Proper Fuse. To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse type and rating specified for this
product.
Avoid Exposed Circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is
present.
OTS9100 User Manual
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Safety Summary
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures. If you suspect there is damage to this product, have
it inspected by qualified service personnel.
Do not operate in Wet/Damp Conditions. To avoid electric shock, do not operate this product
in wet or damp conditions.
Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere. To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this
product in an explosive atmosphere.
Wear Eye Protection. To avoid eye injury, wear eye protections if there is a possibility of
exposure to high-intensity rays.
Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry.
Provide Proper Ventilation. Refer to the manual’s installation instructions for details on
installing the product so it has proper ventilation.
vi
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Summary
Safety Terms and Symbols
Terms in this Manual
These terms may appear in this manual:
Icon
Label
Meaning
Warning statements identify conditions or practices that
could result in injury or loss of life.
WARNING!
Caution statements identify conditions or practices that
could result in damage to this product or other property.
CAUTION!
Terms on the Product
These terms may appear on the product:
DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking.
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.
Symbols on the Product
The following symbols may appear on the product:
ATTENTION
Refer to Manual
Protective Ground
(Earth) Terminal
CAUTION
Laser Radiation
OTS9100 User Manual
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Safety Summary
viii
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
This manual describes how to use the Tektronix OTS9100 module. This manual is your primary
source of information about how the OTS9100 module functions.
The user interface also provides Windows Help files for further information on specific topics.
How This Manual is Organized
This manual is divided into four sections: Getting Started, Operating Basics, Reference, and
Appendices.
•
•
•
Getting Started provides an overview of the OTS9100 module and describes first-time
operation.
Operating Basics explains the basic principles of operating the OTS9100. The Operating
Basics section also includes sample applications.
Reference provides a brief overview of the syntax and format used for remote commands and
provides explanations and listings of all the remote commands that may be used with the
OTS9100 system.
•
The Appendices provide a listing of specifications, default factory settings, an incoming
inspection test, list of acronyms, and other useful information.
OTS9100 User Manual
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions:
ꢀ The names of front-panel connectors and LEDs appear in the manual in the same format as
found on the front panel label, for example, OPTICAL IN and Rx DATA OUT.
ꢀ When the user interface is discussed, all menus, names tags, and button appear in the manual
in the same format as found in the user interface, for example, Enable COM2 and Output
Pulse Trigger.
ꢀ In reference to terminology, the user interface may be set to either SDH or SONET
references. The user manual provides SDH terminology with SONET terminology in
parenthesis immediately following the SDH version. If no second terminology is present, the
terminology is the same for both SDH and SONET.
ꢀ In reference to the instrument, the following conventions apply:
•
•
When referring to the four card 10Gb/s system (Optics, Transmit, Receive, and
Clock), the name OTS9100 is used.
When referring to each individual card, the card name is used, for example, Optics
and Transmit.
NOTE: Some of the content found in this manual does not pertain to some instruments.
Depending on the software revision and the options installed, some of the features
described in these pages may not be available.
x
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
This chapter describes the preparation and initial setup of the OTS9100 module. Also provided
is a list of standard and optional accessories for each of the individual cards.
Product Description
The Optical Test System OTS9100 Module set consists of a 10 Gb/s SONET/SDH transmitter
and receiver. The transmitter consists of a high-speed OC-192c/STM-64c SONET/SDH digital
signal generator feeding a 10 Gb/s fiber-coupled laser and modulator. It is capable of generating
fixed and pseudo-random test patterns mapped into a set of sub-rate payloads or one full payload
rate. The transmitter may also retransmit received 10 Gb/s signals with or without alarm and
error insertion via intrusive through mode capabilities. Both transmitter and receiver support
Unframed Mode. The transmitter supports flexible generation of alarms and errors at SONET
and SDH levels (SONET Section, Line and Path; SDH Regenerator Section, Multiplex Section
and Path).
The receiver consists of a high-speed 10 Gb/s (9.9532 Gb/s) optical receiver feeding an OC-
192c/STM-64c digital signal analyzer. The receiver supports both SONET and SDH (SONET
Section, Line and Path; SDH Regenerator Section, Multiplex Section and Path) alarm and error
detection and accumulation for subsequent software analysis with the ability to print out reports.
The standard OTS9100 module consists of one each of an OTS91L4, OTS91R2, OTS91T3 and
OTS91C3 card. A mixed suite of optical cards provides the OTS9100 module with flexibility to
test for different optical requirements.
The OTS91L4 Transceiver card is the standard optical card for this module. The OTS9100
module will accept any of the OTS optical cards as a replacement for the OTS91L4, expanding
the range of the system to support different types of test analysis. The only requirement is that
the optics card be placed in the first slot position within the OTS9100 module.
Optical card offerings consist of the following:
OTS91L4 Transceiver with 1550 nm or 1310 nm laser option
OTS91L5 Transmitter with 1550 nm or 1310 nm laser option
OTS91L6 Receiver Only
OTS91L7 Transceiver with External Laser Interface (does not include an internal laser)
OTS91L8 Transmit Only with External Laser Interface (does not include an internal laser)
OTS9100 User Manual
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
OTS9100 Features and Capabilities:
•
OC-192 SONET Section, Line, and Path Testing
B1, B2, B3, REI-L, REI-P and random bit Error Generation
B1, B2, B3, REI-L, REI-P Error Measurement
Section, Line, and Path Alarm Generation
J0, J1 byte and sequence Capture; J0, J1 Edit
Section, Line, and Path Alarm Detection
Section, Line, and Path Alarm and Error Generation
STS1, STS3c, STS12c, STS48c, STS192c structured payloads filled with user-selected test
pattern
•
STM-64 SDH Regenerator Section and Multiplex Section Testing
B1, B2, B3, MS-REI, HP-REI, and random bit Error Generation
B1, B2, B3, MS-REI, HP-REI Error Measurement
RS, MS, and Path Alarm Generation
J0, J1 byte and sequence Capture; J0, J1 Edit
RS, MS, and Path Alarm Detection
RS, MS, and Path Layer Alarm Error Generation
VC-3, VC-4-4c, VC-4-16c, VC-4-64c structured payloads filled with user-selected test pattern
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Multi-channel capability in a single mainframe
Available in Transceiver, Receive Only, and Transmit Only configurations
Electrical Offset of Receiver Decision Threshold
Windows 2000 compatible user interface
Easily switched between SONET and SDH modes
Through Mode with Overhead Editing, Error, and Alarm Injection
Direct user download of software updates
GR-253-CORE and CCITT/ITU G.708, G.709 framing
Complete Remote Control via RS-232, GPIB, and Ethernet LAN (10BaseT) ports and scripting
available with the implementation of the OTS Toolkit
•
•
Interface to STE, LTE and other test equipment
High Output Power 1310 nm or 1550 nm Laser Allows Support for Multiple Receivers via an
Optical Splitter
•
•
•
•
G.828/G.829 B1, B2 and B3 Error Analysis
SONET (OC-192c) and SDH (STM-64c) Format Signals Supported in a Single Module
Interchangeable Between the Rackmount, Benchtop and Portable Chassis
Report Printout Capabilities
1-2
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
The OTS9100 meets the needs of development, manufacturing, and service engineers by providing the
capabilities for:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System interrogation and conformance testing
System Qualification
Manufacturing Production Testing
Manufacturing Test of SONET/SDH and DWDM Network equipment
Network Integrity testing
Network Performance monitoring
Network Troubleshooting
Design Verification
DWDM Parallel Channel System Test
Module Test
Equipment Performance Monitoring
In-service Monitoring
OTS9100 User Manual
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Accessories
Accessories included with the OTS9100 module are provided in the following list. If you wish
to purchase optional accessories contact your local Tektronix Representative.
Standard with each shipment
Certificate of Traceable Calibration
119-6364-11
063-3560-03
071-1060-03
OTS9000 Software CD
OTS9100 User Manual CD
OTS9100 Installation Guide
NOTE: DC Blocks are provided for use in two instances only. The first being, one DC Block must
always be connected to the OTS91R2 Receive Card at the Rx interface port in all OTS9100
modules (see Figure 1-3 for cabling illustration).
The second is in regard to use with the Transmit interconnection when using earlier versions of
the optics cards; the OTS91L1, OTS91L2 and the OTS91L3, the earlier optics cards will require
that a DC Block be connected to the Tx DATA OUT interface port.
DO NOT ATTACH A DC BLOCK TO THE OTS91T3 WHEN USING OTS91L4, OTS91L5,
OTS91L6, OTS91L7 OR OTS91L8, DEGRADATION WILL OCCUR.
Each of the optical cards requires a specific set of accessories. Additional items are listed by
each card type below.
OTS91L4 Standard
174-4702-00
6” coax cable (one included with shipment)
8” coax cable (one included with shipment)
174-4277-01
OTS91L5 Standard
174-4702-00
6” coax cable (one included with shipment)
OTS91L6 Standard
174-4702-00
174-4277-01
6” coax cable (one included with shipment)
8” coax cable (one included with shipment)
1-4
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
OTS91L7 Standard
174-4702-00
174-4277-01
6” coax cable (two included with shipment)
8” coax cable (one included with shipment)
OTS91L8 Standard
174-4702-00
6” coax cable (one included with shipment)
Note: Optical connectors require customer supplied cabling.
OTS91R2 Standard
174-4275-01
119-6156-00
4” coax cable (one included with shipment)
DC Block
OTS91T3 Standard
174-4275-01
174-4275-01
119-6156-00
4” coax cable (one included with shipment)
6” coax cable (one included with shipment)
DC Block
OTS91C3 Standard
174-4275-01
4” coax cable (one included with shipment)
Optional
Interface Cables, RS-232-C, GPIB:
RS-232-C
012-1379-00
012-1298-00
GPIB
9-pin female to 9-pin male
9-pin female to 25-pin male
012-0991-00
012-0991-01
2m, double-shielded
1m, double-shielded
NOTE: The GPIB cable is standard equipment with an OTS9010 mainframe.
OTS9100 User Manual
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Adapters, SMA:
015-0572-00
015-0554-00
015-0549-00
SMA male to BNC male
SMA male to BNC female
Male to female connector (Used permanently
installed to prolong life of instrument connector)
020-1693-00
SMA Kit
Miscellaneous:
119-5610-00
119-5970-00
119-5972-00
Fixed 15 dB optical attenuator; FC/PC connector
Fixed 15dB optical attenuator, SC/PC connector
Fixed 15dB optical attenuator, ST/PC connector
International Power Plug Options (Chassis Only)
Option #
A1
Description
220V, Euro Plug
240V, UK Plug
A2
A3
240V, Aust Plug
240V, North American Plug
220V, Swiss Plug
No power cord
A4
A5
A99
1-6
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
First Operation
OTS9100 Installation
Before using the system, verify that it is properly set up and powered on, as follows:
1. Remove the unit from its shipping carton and place it on an anti-static surface.
2. Verify that the operating environment is within the limits detailed under the Environmental
Requirement section in this manual.
3. Allow approximately 2 inches (5 cm) clearance for cooling at the front and rear of the unit.
The fans draw air into the system from the front and exhaust the air through the rear of the
OTS9000 chassis system or through the sides of the OTS9010 and OTS9040 chassis systems.
4. If the module cards are not already installed, perform the following steps:
CAUTION! When installing and removing cards from the chassis, power must not be present.
Ensure that all power switches are in the OFF position and power cords are not installed
before removing or installing cards. The chassis does NOT support hot-swap installations.
A. Remove the cards from the packaging, if necessary.
CAUTION! All OTS cards are static sensitive. When handling cards, ensure that personnel
are properly grounded and OTS cards are always placed on anti-static surfaces. If proper
precautions are not taken, damage will occur.
B. For those locations in which cards are being installed, remove the blanking panels and air
diverters.
C. Verify the required configuration of cards before proceeding. Carefully install each card
into a slot in the chassis. Make sure that the card is lined up and fits cleanly with the
connectors into the backplane of the chassis.
CAUTION! Beware of bending the pins of the connectors when installing and removing cards
from the chassis. Backplane connectors with bent pins will cause damage to both the card
and the chassis.
To install the card, slowly slide the card into the desired slot. Make sure the card is lined up with
the connectors and push down on the top release and up on the bottom release until the card
snaps into place.
OTS9100 User Manual
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
When the card is in place, tighten the two screws to secure it.
CAUTION! Do not torque the screws with more than 2 in-lbs of force or damage will occur.
5. Verify that the power switch of the OTS chassis is in the OFF position.
6. Plug the unit into the appropriate AC Power source as follows:
Table 1-4: Power Requirements
AC Voltage
110 VAC
220 VAC
Voltage Range
90 VAC - 132 VAC
180 VAC - 250 VAC
Frequency Range
48 - 62 Hz
48 - 62 Hz
Removing Cards
To remove the OTS cards, perform the following steps:
1. Turn off the power.
2. Fully loosen the two screws found on the top and bottom of the card.
3. Push up on the top release and down on the bottom release until the card is released from the
connectors.
4. Carefully slide the card out of the slot.
NOTE: If a card is removed, a blanking panel and air diverter must be installed to ensure
proper airflow through the system. Failure to replace the air diverter and blanking panel could
cause the system to overheat.
1-8
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Slot Positioning of OTS Cards
The slot in which each card is installed is very important to the proper operation of the
instrument. Because of the user interface configurations, certain cards must be in specific slot
positions in order to take advantage of features to operate correctly.
The OTS9100 module consists of a grouping of four cards. For every OTS9100 module group,
the Optics card must be in the leftmost card or slot 1 (Does not apply to a multi-channel system).
The Optics card must be followed by the Receive card in the second position, the Transmit card
must be in the third position and the Clock Trigger card must always be in the right-most position
or fourth position within the four card module grouping.
Multiple Modules
A module group may span the CPU in a multi-module system if necessary. The sequence of
cards should continue from one side of the CPU slot(s) onto the other side. The CPU card(s) may
interrupt the sequence physically but does not end the module group. Slot positioning with the
CPU interrupting a sequence of cards will not affect the functionality of the OTS cards on either
side of the CPU slot position(s). Empty slots, or slots containing non-Tektronix cards; effectively
‘end’ the module group.
When an OTS9100 10 Gb/s module and an OTS9200 Jitter module are loaded within the same
chassis the slot positioning must start with the OTS9100 optical card positioned in the first
position with the rest of the OTS9100 module loading sequentially as described above, the
OTS9200 module must be adjacent to the OTS9100.
Through Mode operation is only supported when the module has been loaded into slots 1-4 of the
chassis and only when the modules are installed in the following order:
•
•
•
•
Optics card is in slot 1
Receive card is in slot 2
Transmit card is in slot 3
Clock Trigger card is in slot 4
If cards are not installed in this order, “through mode” is not allowed as a Tx Signal Source.
NOTE: If the slot positioning rules are not followed, the module functions will be invalid. The
transmitter and receiver functionality depends upon the absolute slot position and relative order
of the cards.
OTS9100 User Manual
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Figure 1-1: OTS9000 with card slot assignment
The slot assignments shown in Figure 1-1 show an OTS9100 module loaded into an OTS9000 chassis to
support through mode.
Figure 1-2: OTS9040 with OTS9100 installation
The slot assignments shown in Figure 1-2 show an OTS9100 module loaded into an OTS9040 chassis.
1-10
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Module Card Interconnection
Before powering on the system, install the cables and DC blocks provided for signal
interconnection of the module cards. Use Figure 1-3 as a reference guide. (See Appendix G for
cabling an OTS9100 module with a tunable laser).
NOTE: Depending upon the configuration of the OTS cards within the OTS-9000, some of these
connections may not need to be made. If multiple cards are present within the system, the 8”
cables provided may be required in place of the 4” cables.
1. Attach a 4 or 6” coax cable from the Rx DATA OUT port of the Optical card. Connect the
other end of the cable to the Rx DATA IN port DC block located on the Receive card. The
Optical card is now connected to the Receive card.
2. Attach a 4 or 6” coax cable to the Tx DATA IN port of the Optics card. Connect the other
end of the 4 or 6” coax cable from the Tx DATA IN port to the Tx DATA OUT (Tx) port of
the Transmit card. The Optical card is now connected to the Transmit card.
3. For through mode only: Attach a 4 or 6” coax cable to the Rx CLOCK OUT port of the
Receive card. Connect the other end of the cable to the Rx CLOCK IN port of the Clock
Trigger card. The Receive card is now connected to the Clock Trigger card.
4. Attach a 4” coax cable to the 10GHz Clock In port of the Transmit card to the 10GHz Clock
Out port of the Clock Trig card. The Transmit card is now connected to the Clock Trig card.
NOTE: To install peripherals (mouse, monitor, keyboard), refer to the chassis manual.
CAUTION! Before moving previously installed cables, loosen the connections on both ends of
the cable. If one end of a cable is moved and the other end is not loosened, damage to the
cable will occur.
OTS9100 User Manual
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Figure 1-3: Proper location Interconnection cables
Power On and Software Initialization
1. Set the Power Switch, on the back of the chassis, to the ON position. Turn on the display
monitor. Wait for Windows to boot and present the login prompt.
2. The first time the system is turned on, a Microsoft Licensing Wizard will run, follow the
prompts and enter the Windows 2000 License Key number, operator name, password and
network identifier. The License Key number is located on a label affixed to the OTS chassis.
This utility will run only for this initial one time system launch.
3. To logon, press CNTL-ALT+DEL.
4. The logon information dialog box is now displayed. Verify that the user name is
‘Administrator’ and there is no password then click OK.
5. To launch the system application, click the OTS9000 icon on the desktop.
NOTE: The OTS9000 application may also be reached through the START menu. Click START,
select Tektronix, then select OTS9000.
1-12
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Module Quick Check
NOTE: Before installing the optical cables, clean the optical fiber connectors on both the cable
ends and the front panel connectors.
1. With proper in-line 15dB attenuator, connect a single mode optical cable between the Optical
OUT and Optical IN connectors on the Optics card.
CAUTION! Signal levels greater than 0 dBm may damage the Optical Input devices. Always
pad the input level to less than 0 dBm.
Always use 15dBm of attenuation when connecting the OTS9100 module transmit output to its
receive input. Failure to do so will damage the optical detector.
2. If the instrument is not already powered on, start the system as described in the Power On
and Software Initialization procedure of the previous section.
3. From the Menu Bar, click the System button; this opens a drop down menu. In the drop down
menu select Signal Standard then select Set to SONET.
4. Transmitter Setup
From the Menu Bar, click on View and select System View. The System View should
display an image with each card in position. Check this view to ensure that all the cards
loaded are visible. Blue lines spanning across the cards represent the correct cabling for the
configuration of cards loaded in the system. The System View window is meant to be used as
a reference for verifying cards and cabling a system. It does not provide a means to
determine live or dead cards.
5. Click the Setup Category bar in the Navigation window and select the OTS91T3 10Gb/s Tx+
#1 icon. The Setup Property Page associated with the selected icon should display.
6. In the Property Page window, select the Signal tab and make the following selections from
the pull-down menus:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Signal Source: Internal
Timing Source: Internal
Trigger Output: Anomaly
Active Channel, Signal Structure: STS-1
Active Channel, Test Pattern: PRBS 2^23-1 (ITU)
Active Channel, 1
7. Select the Error Insertion tab and make the following selections:
•
•
Anomaly Insertion Setup Type: None
Defect Insertion Setup Type: None
8. Receiver Setup
In the Navigation window, keeping the Setup Category as the active category (always check
the Title Bar of the Setup Menu to ensure that it is associated with the correct device), select
the OTS91R2 10Gb/s Rx+ #1 icon and set the Receiver Threshold Offset level to 0 mV.
9. In the Navigation window, click on the Test Control Category bar and select the OTS91R2
10Gb/s Rx+ #1 icon.
10. Click the Edit Test Control Settings.
OTS9100 User Manual
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
11. Click the radio button for Continuous test mode and then click OK to close the dialog box.
12. Use the key provided to disable the laser lockout at the front of the Optical card.
13. On the Laser Control bar, select the OTS91T3 10Gb/s Tx+ #1 laser and click On. On the
Optics module card front panel, verify the following:
•
•
the Optical Out LED lights green
the Sig Pres LED under Optical IN lights green
14. On the Test Control bar, click the start button to begin a test.
15. On the front panel of the Receive module card, verify that the LOS, DEFECT, and
ANOMALY LEDs are all off.
16. Verify that the Status window has no lit error indicators except the green Signal Present
indicator.
17. In the Navigation window, click the Setup bar and select the OTS91T3 10Gb/s Tx+ #1 icon.
18. Select the Error Insertion tab.
19. Under Anomaly Insertion Setup, click the pull-down menu for Type and select B1 BIP.
20. Click Apply Anomaly Setup Changes.
21. Click Insert Single three times to insert three single errors. Verify that the Anomaly LED on
the Receive front panel flashes for each B1 injected. In the Status window, the red B1
indicator should flash for each B1 injected and the yellow B1 indicator should remain lit.
22. In the Navigation window, click Measurements and select the OTS91T3 10Gb/s Rx+ #1
icon.
23. Click on the Cumulative tab.
24. Verify that the B1 line has data entered.
25. On the Test Control bar, click the Stop Test button.
26. On the Laser Control bar, select the OTS91T3 10Gb/s Tx+ #1 laser and click Off.
27. Use the key provided to enable the laser lockout.
1-14
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Emergency Startup Disk
Instructions for creating an emergency startup disk can be found in Appendix D. It is
recommended that you take the time to do this simple procedure every time you change your
system configuration.
Shutdown and Power Off
If necessary, it is considered safe to shut off power without prior shutdown steps. However, it is
strongly suggested that a more orderly shutdown be followed. To perform an orderly shutdown,
use the following steps:
1. Close the OTS9000 application by selecting Exit under the System menu.
2. From the Start button on the Windows 2000 Taskbar, choose Shut Down.
3. On the Shutdown dialog box, choose Shut down the computer and click Yes.
4. When the Windows 2000 message ‘It is now safe to turn off your computer’ appears, turn off
power.
OTS9100 User Manual
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Module Operating Basics
This section describes the OTS9100 module front panel indicators and connectors.
Front Panel Indicators and Connectors
Figure 2-1 shows a complete view of the front panel.
WARNING: Always avoid exposure to the laser beam.
Before power is applied to the OTS9100 module be
sure that all laser outputs are either covered with the
screw cap provided or connected to the appropriate
circuit.
The front panel is made up of four different cards:
•
•
•
•
Optics
Transmit
Receive
Clock Trigger
The following sections describe each of these cards
in more detail.
NOTE: There are several versions of the optical card
available. Each OTS91Lx series card has been
designed with targeted analysis capabilities directed
at specific analysis needs. For additional information
on each OTS91Lx series card see Appendix A.
Figure 2-1: OTS9100 Front Panel
OTS9100 User Manual
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: Functional Overview
10Gb/s Transceiver Optics
The 10Gb/s Transceiver is available with two laser options, 1310
nm and 1550 nm. The 1310 nm Optical Transceiver consists of a
1310 nm Transmitter combined with a broad band Receiver. The
1550 nm Optical Transceiver consists of a 1550 nm Transmitter
combined with a broad band Receiver
Figure 2-2 shows the Transceive card with 1310 nm laser front
panel.
The front panel of the Transceiver card has optical inputs and
outputs, a laser lockout feature, and LED monitoring lights. Each
of these items is described in more detail below.
Module OK
The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is
running. On power up, the LED first lights red, then will switch to
green when the system has finished initializing.
NOTE: If the LED remains red after the system has finished
initializing, call Tektronix for service.
The Optics Transceiver card of the OTS9100 module provides
all of the optical interfaces of the 10Gb/s SDH/SONET module.
Figure 2-2 shows the Optic Transceiver card front panel.
WARNING: Always avoid exposure to the laser beam. Before
power is applied to the OTS9100 module be sure that all laser
outputs are either covered with the screw cap provided or
connected to the appropriate circuit. Keeping a laser output covered
prevents dirt from contaminating the connector.
Optical OUT
The Optical Output transmits an optical data signal at a
wavelength of 1310 nm or 1550 nm, with the proper installed
option. The optical connector can be configured with field
interchangeable shells: FC (standard), ST, or SC type. The field
interchangeable shells are easily removed to allow cleaning of the
optical connector interface.
Figure 2-2: 1310 nm
Transceiver Front Panel
The LED found under Optical OUT will light to green when the
laser is active.
NOTE: If the LED lights red or fails to light at all, call Tektronix for
service.
2-2
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: Functional Overview
Optical IN
The Optical IN connection accepts the incoming optical signal to
the receiver. This input signal must have a wavelength between
1290 nm and 1565 nm and must not exceed –0 dBm of power.
The green LED labeled SIG PRES under the Optical IN heading
will light when the Optics card detects an incoming signal. Red
flashing indicates an optical loss condition. An amber flashing
LED indicates an optical overload condition.
WARNING: The incoming signal must be attenuated to within
specified power levels. If the signal exceeds –0 dBm, damage may
occur.
Rx DATA OUT
Rx DATA OUT provides signal interconnection between the
module cards. This output must be connected to the Rx DATA IN
connection found on the Receive card of the OTS9100 module
using the coax cable and DC block provided.
Rx DATA OUT
Rx DATA OUT is a 10 Gb/s DATA Signal provided for jitter
measurements. This signal must be connected to the 10 Gb/s
DATA IN connector of the OTS92H1 Clock Receive card.
Tx Data IN
Tx Data Input provides signal interconnection between the module
cards. This input must be connected to the Tx Data Out
connection found on the Transmit card of the OTS9100 module
using the coax cable provided.
WARNING: Always avoid exposure to the laser beam. Before power
is applied to the OTS9100 module be sure that all laser outputs
are either covered with the screw cap provided or connected to the
appropriate circuit.
Figure 2-3:
1550 nm Transceiver
Front Panel
OTS-9100 User Manual
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: Functional Overview
Laser Lockout, Remote Interlock
REMOTE INTERLOCK is a bantam plug normally closed connection internally wired in series
with the laser lockout key switch. It can be used with additional hardware to remotely disable
the laser output.
NOTE: If this connection is used, the ferrite bead provided with the module must be attached to
the remote interlock cable for lower emissions and CE mark conformance. Install the bead close
to the end of the cable connected to the Optics card.
Laser LOCKOUT is a safety device. The key switch disables the laser output when it is turned
to the “closed lock” position. The laser output can only be turned on when the key is in the
“open lock” position.
NOTE: The laser output cannot be enabled unless:
•
•
•
The Laser Lockout key switch is set to the “open lock” or on position.
The Remote Interlock is either not used or externally enabled.
The Laser output is software enabled.
NOTE: Optical cables use and care
1. When using the optical cables ensure that the cable is firmly seated in the front panel
connector. The optical connectors on the front panel are keyed. If the cable is not inserted
into the connector key properly, the connection between cable and front panel will not be
complete and so will cause errors in transmission and receiver functions.
2. Always be sure to clean both cable connectors and front panel connectors before installing
optical cables. A dirty optical connection can cause errors in transmission and receiver
functions.
2-4
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: Functional Overview
Receive Analysis
The Receive card contains the receiver SDH/SONET signal
analysis functionality for the OTS9100 10Gb/s SDH/SONET
module.
Figure 2-4 shows the Receive card front panel.
Module OK
The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is
running. On power up, the LED first lights red, then will switch
to yellow, and finally to green when the system has finished
initializing.
NOTE: If the LED remains red after the system has finished
initializing, call Tektronix for service.
LOS
The LOS (Loss of Signal) LED indicator can be off, red, or
yellow. This indicator will turn red when the receiver detects a
Loss-of-signal condition. Once the receiver regains the signal,
the LOS indicator will turn to yellow and remain yellow until a
new test is started, the module is powered off, or the receiver
detects another Loss-of-signal condition.
A yellow history indicator signifies that LOS has occurred since
the most recent test started, but is not currently detected.
The LOS indicator will turn off when a new test is started.
DEFECT
The Defect indicator can be off, red, or yellow. This indicator
will turn red when a defect (no signal present, LOS, LOF, OOF
(SEF), MS-AIS (AIS-L), MS-RDI (RDI-L), LOP, AIS-P, or
RDI-P) is detected. It will flash red if defects are detected
intermittently.
A yellow history indicator signifies that a Defect has been
detected since the most recent test started, but is not currently
detected.
The Defect indicator will turn off when a new test is started.
Figure 2-4: Receive
Front Panel
OTS9100 User Manual
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: Functional Overview
ANOMALY
The Anomaly indicator can be off, red, or yellow. This indicator will turn red if an anomaly (B1,
B2, REI-L, B3, FAS, REI-P, or payload error) is detected. It will flash red if an anomaly is
detected intermittently.
A yellow history indicator signifies that an Anomaly has been detected since the most recent test
started, but is not currently detected.
The Anomaly indicator will turn off when a new test is started.
Rx Event OUT
The Rx Event Output is user activated and provides an active HIGH for each alarm or error
condition generated. The output will provide a single pulse for each frame containing errors. It
can be used as a means of triggering an oscilloscope or other test equipment. The output has an
SMA connector and requires 50 termination for signal integrity.
Rx Data IN
The Rx Data Input provides signal interconnection between the module cards. This input must
be connected to the Rx DATA OUT connection found on the Optics card of the OTS9100
module using the coax cable and DC block provided.
Rx Clock OUT
The Rx Clock Output provides signal interconnection between the module cards. This output
must be connected to the Rx Clock Input found on the Clock Trigger card of the OTS9100
module using the coax cable provided.
2-6
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: Functional Overview
Transmit Generation
The Transmit card of the OTS9100 module contains all of the
transmitter functionality for the 10Gb/s SDH/SONET module.
Figure 2-5 shows the Transmit card front panel.
Module OK
The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is
running. On power up, the LED first lights red, then will switch
to green when the system has finished initializing.
The LED will flash YELLOW if one or more internal clock
circuits can not lock to the 10GHz clock input. This condition
occurs when the input clock is not within specified frequency
range.
Note: If the LED flashes Yellow, the 10 GHz input clock is
missing or out of range. If the LED remains red after the
system has finished initializing, call Tektronix for service.
Tx EVENT OUT
The Tx Event Output is user activated and provides an active
HIGH for each alarm or error condition generated. The output
will provide a single pulse for each frame containing errors. It
can be used as a means of triggering an oscilloscope or other test
equipment. The output has an SMA connector and requires 50
Ohms termination for signal integrity.
F-SYNC OUT
The Frame Synchronization Output provides a signal that is
asserted to indicate the start of a frame. It may be used as a
means of triggering an oscilloscope to capture the 10Gb/s Optical
Output signal. The output has an SMA connector and requires 50
Ohms termination for signal integrity.
Figure 2-5:
Transmit Front Panel
OTS9100 User Manual
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: Functional Overview
622 MHz TRIG OUT
The 622 MHz TRIG OUT provide a bit-rate/16 signal that may be
used for triggering an oscilloscope to capture the 10 Gb/s Output
signal. The output has an SMA connector and requires 50 Ohms
termination for signal integrity.
Tx DATA OUT
Tx Data Output provides a DC-coupled CML output signal for
interconnection between the module cards. This output must be
connected to the Tx DATA IN connection found on the Optics
card of the OTS9100 module using the coax cable provided.
Note: When connecting to an OTS91L1 card, a DC block
must also be installed.
10 GHz CLOCK IN
The 10 GHz Clock IN is the bit-rate clock for the Tx Data Out
interface. This input must be connected to the 10 GHz Clock Out
port of the Clock Trigger card using the coax cable provided.
2-8
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: Functional Overview
Clock Trigger
The Clock Trigger card provides the reference clock sources
for the transmitter and receiver functions of the 10 Gb/s
SDH/SONET module.
Figure 2-6 shows the Clock Trigger card front panel.
Module OK
The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is
running. On power up, the LED first lights red, then will switch
to green when the system has finished initializing.
The LED will flash YELLOW if the clock’s multiplier can not
lock to the selected reference input. This condition occurs when
the input clock is not within specified frequency range.
Note: If the LED flashes Yellow, the 10 GHz input clock is
missing or out of range. If the LED remains red after the
system has finished initializing, call Tektronix for service.
155 MHz EXTERNAL CLOCK IN
The External Clock Input accepts a 155 MHz clock signal which
can be used to offset the transmit signal. The input has an SMA
connector and 50 Ohms termination.
10 GHz TRIG OUT
The 10 GHz Trigger Output provides a bit-rate signal that may
be used for triggering an oscilloscope to capture the 10 Gb/s
Output signal. The output has an SMA connector and requires
50 Ohms termination for signal integrity.
Rx CLOCK IN
The Rx Clock Input provides signal interconnection between the
module cards. This input must be connected to the Rx Clock
Output found on the Receive card of the OTS9100 module using
the coax cable provided.
Figure 2-6:
Clock Trigger Front
Panel
OTS9100 User Manual
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: Functional Overview
10 GHz Clock Out
This output is connected to the OTS91T3 card using the coax cable provided.
10 GHz CLOCK IN
The 10 GHz Clock IN provides a bit-rate clock input that typically is connected to the OTS92H1
10 GHz JITTER Clock Out port. This input is selected when Transmit Timing is set to “Jitter”.
2-10
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Software Interface Operating Basics
This section describes the OTS9000 software interface. It also reviews the basic functionality of
the Microsoft Windows application software with menu descriptions.
User Interface
The user interface software for the OTS Family Optical Test System controls all configuration,
testing, and measuring commands of the OTS cards. The user interface provides easily navigated
menus using Windows® ‘point and click’ operation on a Windows 2000 workstation.
Refer to the section, Getting Started, for information on how to load and launch the user
interface software.
When the OTS Optical Test System is first powered on the software scans the card slots to
determine what modules are loaded. The user interface then provides icons in the navigation
window for each card loaded into the system. These icons always reflect the cards loaded and
will change depending on the system being used. Because of this ‘on the fly’ software feature,
some of the menus and abilities described in this manual may not be available in all systems
since many features require a particular card installation. In addition, some of the menu screens
may appear different from those displayed in this manual.
The user interface screen has a number of windows and bars that comprise the main screens of
the software, some of which may be disabled. The next section, Elements of the User Interface,
identifies each element on the main screen. The sections following it provide supporting
descriptions for each of these elements.
NOTE: The user interface is a Microsoft Windows 2000 application. Information
regarding standard Windows 2000 functions is beyond the scope of this document. For
further information on basic commands and functions of Windows 2000, refer to the
Windows 2000 manual.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Elements of the User Interface
The user interface has a number of windows and bars that comprise the main screens of the
software. Figure 2-6 identifies each of these elements. The Navigation Window, Test, Laser
Control bars, and Status Windows may be disabled for more viewing space, if desired.
Current, Activated Card
Identification Bar
Test Control bar
Laser Control bar
Active Task Bar
Menu Bar
Tool Bar
Clear History
Control
Scroll Rocker
Control
Frame
Grabbers
Scroll Controls
for extended
Navigation
Window
Card Slot
Selection
Drop Down
Menu
Active LED
Tool Bar
Window
(a dockable
floating
Navigation
Window
(a dockable
floating
window)
window)
Category
Title
Property Pages
Status bar indicators
Bars for
each
Figure 2-6:
Location of Status and Navigation Windows displayed in a Single Mode View
2-12
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Task Bar
The Task bar reflects the active device and function. When a device is selected from the
Navigation window the identification of that device will appear in the Task bar. The window
controls for the Tektronix interface can be accessed by using these selections they include,
restore, minimize, maximize and close.
Menu Bar
The Menu provides the access to System controls and
functions, Views, Device controls and functions, Window
and Help functions. The Menu bar contains the control
menus for System, View, Device, Window and Help. The
Menu Bar controls can also be accessed by clicking on the
buttons found in the Tool Bar that correspond. The
corresponding button is shown beside each menu selection.
System
The System menu provides the user with access to system
level functions. The functions accessed through the System
selection are Select Server, Save Server Settings, Recall
Server Settings, Server Lockout, Signal Standard (choose SONET or SDH), Remote
Control, Results File Management and Exit.
View
The View menu allows the user to control which toolbars will be activated in the working
window framework. The functions accessed through the View selection are Navigation Window,
Tool Bar, LED window, LED Panel, Laser Control Bar, Test Control Bar, SCPI, System View,
Test Results Files, Toolbars and Options.
Device
The Device menu access the controls used for the selected device. The controls used for the
device are Setup, Signal Monitor, Test Control, Measurements, Analysis, APS Measurements
and Compliance.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Window
The Window menu provides the ability to setup how the menus are displayed within the OTS
workspace. It is possible to set the display to a single window or multiple menu windows through
this menu. Display functions include Single Mode (displaying one window at a time) and
Multiple Mode (displaying many windows simultaneously).
Single Mode
Single Mode displays one active window, full size, with no visible representation for other
properties. Exit the Single Mode display by deselecting the check box for Single Mode from the
Menu bar. Deselecting Single Mode enables other Window options.
Multiple Mode
To get a multiple window display, more than one window at a time, select Cascade, Tile
Horizontally, Tile Vertically. To enable this feature Multiple functions must be active. Setup
displays the active device setup menu.
Figure 2-6:
Multiple Window Mode View
Help
The Help menu provides a means of accessing more information on the product, on the system
and on the company. The menu consists of Help Topics (OTS Product Family Help System),
System Info (clipboard indicating which modules are installed), Remote Commands (key word
search field) and About Tektronix (license and version).
2-14
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Tool Bar
The toolbar provides easy access to different views and selections of the user interface. The
buttons on the toolbar provide a toggle between select server, the LED window, the module LED
panel, the system view, the Navigation window, the laser and test control bars, and the SCPI
output. Each of these controls is discussed in further detail in later sections. The Test Control bar
may be activated via the View menu or from the toggle key on the toolbar.
LASER
TEST
LED MODULES
SCPI
LED PANEL
SELECT
SERVER
SYSTEM
NAVIGATION
NOTE: Changing parameters while a test is in progress may cause invalid errors.
Laser Control Bar
Test Control Bar
Laser Control bar
The Laser Control bar provides the user with software control over the laser. Use the pull down
menu to select which laser to activate or deactivate. Click the On button to turn on the selected
laser. Click the Off button to turn off the selected laser.
Click the
button to close the bar or use the View menu to activate the bar. When the “…”
button is clicked, the Setup Summary is displayed.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Test Control Bar
The Test Control bar provides the controls to start, stop, pause, and continue the test. If multiple
cards are present, the test control bar also allows the user to choose the specific card under test
by use of the pull down menu. The Test Control bar may be activated via the View menu or
from the
toggle button on the toolbar.
NOTE: Changing parameters while a test is in progress may cause invalid errors.
Main Status Bar
Error Status
Indicator
Client
Lockout
Jitter Status
Indicator
Test Status
Indicator
Laser Status
Indicator
The main status bar, provides a summary status all active modules, these could include laser, test,
error insertion, optical and jitter transmit states of all modules. Whether a status button displays
on the status bar or not is dependent upon the configuration of the loaded OTS cards. Each
button has to states, an On or Active state and an OFF or Inactive state.
Client Lockout
The user interface has the ability to lockout other users from setting parameters. To set the
lockout control, double click the box to the left of the main status bar (if this feature is in an
inactive state the box will be an empty gray square). The Lockout Control dialog box will be
displayed. Click the desired button and then click OK to return to the main screen. When the
lockout is in effect, a lock symbol will appear in the box by the main status bar. To unlock the
server, use the same procedure.
When one client has locked out others, the lockout indicator
will be displayed. If an operator
tries to change a configuration parameter while locked out, a warning dialog will be displayed.
The lockout control dialog box may also be accessed by selecting Server Lockout from the
System menu.
Jitter
Error
If jitter is generated the Jitter Inactive status box will change color and change from Jitter
Inactive to active. If no jitter is being generated the Jitter Inactive message is displayed on a
background of gray.
If an error insertion rate is active, the status bar will change color and change from Error Inactive
to Error Active. If no errors are being created the Error Inactive message is displayed on a
background of gray.
2-16
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Test
If a test is active in any module in the system, the status bar will change color and the Test
Inactive message will change to Test Active. If no test is being conducted the Test Inactive
message is displayed on a background of gray.
Laser Off
If any laser is active in the system, the status bar will change from Laser Off to a Laser On
warning. If the laser is not in use the Laser Off message is displayed on a background of gray.
Frame Grabbers
Frame Grabbers indicate that a window within the interface is dockable or will float. They can be
vertical or horizontal, each bar representing a window. Double click on the button containing the
bars and the window will detach from its location. To reattach the window, drag it back to that
location.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
LED Window
Activating the LED Status window provides the user with a virtual
LED status panel for the OTS9100 receiver(s), as shown in
Figure 2-7. The virtual indicators found on this window
provide error conditions, both current and historical, for
all traditional receiver error LEDs. The LED Status window
may be activated through the View menu or from the toggle key
on the toolbar.
AGGREGATE
SIGNAL
S
E
C
T
I
Each condition has two separate indicators, the one on the right
is the Current condition and the indicator on the left is the
History. The Current indicators will turn red and the History
indicators will turn yellow if an error condition currently exists.
Once the condition has been removed, the red Current indicator
will turn off. The yellow History indicator will remain on until a
new test has been started or until the Clear History button is clicked.
O
N
L
I
N
E
See Table 2-1 for a description of each indicator.
P
A
T
H
Note: Extended Panel information can be viewed with
scrolling LED bars, this feature is only enabled when a panel
is extended beyond the framework.
Three LED panel views can be enabled from within the OTS9000
application, the Module Summary Panel, the Slot Signal Panel and
the User Customizable Signal Panel.
Note: The LED panels display Receiver information only.
When only one receiver has been selected from the navigation
bar no user selectable signals will be available.
Click on the drop down menu for the LED panel to access the possible choices for the LED
panel. Each selection provides specific controls for the active LED. The choices are Module
Signal, Slot Signal and User Selected Signal. Each state is described below.
2-18
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Module Signal Summary LED Panel
The summary of signal states for an individual panel. The Module Signal
Summary LED Panel provides a summary status of error signals for the
active panel.
Slot Signal LED Panel
Selecting the Slot Signal will display the LEDs for the chosen card slot.
User Selected Signal LED Window
The User Selected panel displays the results of a “User defined” state.
The user can select specific cards and display the LED states for all cards
selected. Multiple LED panel readings are aggregated into one uniform
panel display. For example, an LOS LED will be lit or “ON” if even one
out of a grouping of three cards has a loss of signal. If all three cards have no LOS then the LOS
LED would be “OFF” or not lit.
A fourth panel titled Select Signals to OR…provides access to the User Selected panel. Choosing
Select Signals to OR from the drop down menu launches a Customizable User LED Panel menu.
Three Entry Fields are contained within the menu, Panel Title Line 1, Panel Title Line 2 and a
list of active cards with check boxes.
Panel Title Line 1: Enter the name or title to be assigned to a user defined test group.
Panel Title Line 2: Enter the name or title to be assigned to a user defined test group.
Select Signal Panel Combinations provides a listing of all available Receiver cards. Choose a
combination of cards by clicking in the boxes adjacent to the card titles to select (check) or
deselect (uncheck) each available card. The User Defined Panel displays the results of these
selections.
Clear History
The Clear History button is used to clear the current history. History will begin resampling data
starting from the point in time that it was cleared.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Module LED Panel
The module LED panel operates like the LED Window. This panel is accessed via the View
menu. It may also be toggled from the tool bar. To make the panel always remain on top of the
Windows screen, check the box marked ‘Always on top’.
There are two differences between the LED Window and the module LED panel. The module
LED panel does not provide the LED display options; all LEDs are always displayed. In
addition, in the module LED panel mode, all receiver LED panels are shown. In the example in
Figure 2-8, there are four receiver cards loaded, an OTS91R2, OTS93R1, OTS92R1, OTS91R1
and one synchronization card the OTS92S1. Observe that the LEDs shown are different for each
card.
NOTE: For each card, the user interface only displays the options available for that
card. If the options are not displayed, then the option is not available for that particular
card. This view does not display the Module Summary or the User Definable panels.
Figure 2.7. The LED Module Display
2-20
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Table 2-1: Description of Status Window Virtual LED Indicators
LED name
Signal Present
LOS
LOF
SEF (OOF)
Description
The Signal indicator will light green when the receiver senses an incoming signal.
The Loss of Signal indicator is activated when a LOS condition has been detected.
The Loss of Frame indicator is activated when a Loss of frame condition has occurred.
The Severely Errored Frame (Out of Frame) indicator is activated when an Out of frame
condition has occurred.
FAS
B1
The Frame Alignment Sequence indicator activates when errors have been detected in the
A1/A2 framing bytes.
The B1 indicator will activate when SDH Regenerator (SONET Section) parity errors have
occurred.
TIM-S (RS TIM)
AIS-L (MS AIS)
The TIM indicator activates when a J0 trace is received that does not match the expected trace.
The AIS indicator activates when the overhead and SPE are set to all ones for a user-selected
time.
B2
The B2 indicator activates when SDH Multiplex Section (SONET Line) parity errors have been
detected.
RDI-L (MS RDI)
The RDI indicator activates when bits 6, 7, and 8, of the K2 byte have been a binary 110,
respectively, for five or more consecutive frames.
MS REI (REI-L)
AIS-P (AU-AIS)
LOP-P (AU-
LOP)
The REI indicator activates when a non-zero value in the M1 byte is detected.
The Path AIS indicator activates when the pointer is set to hex 3FF for five consecutive frames.
The LOP (Loss of Pointer) indicator is activated when a Loss of Pointer condition has occurred.
A LOP condition exists when ten consecutive pointer errors are received.
The B3 indicator activates when Path parity errors have been detected.
B3
RDI-P (HP-RDI)
REI-P (HP-REI)
TIM-P (HP-TIM)
The RDI indicator activates when bits 5, 6, and 7 of the K3 byte have been a binary 1xx,
respectively.
The Path REI indicator activates when bits 1-4 of G1 are decimal values between one and
eight.
The TIM indicator activates when a J1 trace is received that does not match the expected trace.
The trace setup is explained later in this section.
UNEQ-P (HP-
UNEQ)
The unequipped path indicator activates when C2 equals zero.
PLM-P (HP-
PLM)
The Path Label Mismatch occurs when the received C2 does not match the expected C2.
LSS
The Loss of Sequence indicator activates if BER is greater than or equal to 0.20 during an
interval of one second or if the test sequence and reference sequence are out of phase.
The Test Sequence Error indicator activates when a bit error occurs in the payload.
Bit Error (TSE)
OTS9100 User Manual
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
LED Display Selection
The LED indicators displayed in the LED window reflect the status of each OTS receiver loaded
in the system. Choices may be made by using the pull down menu to select each individual slot, a
Module Summary, or User Selected Signals. Figure 2-9 reflects the LED Window for each of the
LED Display selections.
If Select Signals to OR is selected a menu with a check box list displays. Choices made in this
menu determine what the User Selected Signals will display. Two user defined fields are
provided as a means to label different test names.
The User Selected Signals display reflects all the user defined selections made in the Select
Signals to OR… check box.
Module Summary displays a generalized summarization of all LED states of each individual slot.
Selecting an individual slot from the drop down menu causes all the LEDs associated with the
selected card slot to display. Only the status of the selected slot will be displayed.
Select Signal
User Selected Signal
Slot Signal
Module Summary
(default view)
Figure 2-9: LED Display selection options
2-22
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Navigation Window
The Navigation window provides the ability to set up, monitor and
test the module, and to view the test results. The Navigation window
can be displayed via two methods, by category or by device. Set the
display window by selecting View>Options from the File Menu bar.
A choice of, by Category or By Device, is provided under the
Navigation Mode column in this window.
The Navigation window contains categories representing Setup,
Signal, Monitor, Test control, Measurements, Analysis, APS
measurement and Compliance. It displays each of the OTS cards
loaded in the system with an associated device icon. Each category
provides additional configuration and control options for the selected
OTS card.
When selected each Category bar moves to the top of the Navigation
window, reflecting the current selection. If a new icon is not selected
from the new navigation view, the menu will still reflect the previous
Navigation window selection. For example, the Navigation window
may show the Signal Monitor icons, when the currently selected
menu is actually Setup-OTS91T2 10Gb/s Tx #1.
The Navigation bar is adaptive. Entries are added depending on the
system configuration. When the server connection is established, the
user interface automatically scans for loaded hardware and displays
the appropriate folders and icons for the hardware on that server.
For example, the sample screen, reflects three transmitters
(OTS91T1, OTS91T3 and OTS92T1), two receivers (OTS91R2 and
OTS92R1) and one synchronization card (OTS92S1). Each card is
represented with a separate icon. Multiple icons of the same type
provide the same screens, but contain custom controls for each
specific card.
Category View
Device View
Note: Pay attention to the relationship between the icon selected in the Navigation
window to the Active Title Bar.
When changing screen controls by clicking on a category title in the Navigation window, ensure
that the correct device is still currently activated. A new device icon in the Navigation window
must be clicked to change the associated screen menu.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Scroll Buttons
The scroll buttons are part of the Navigation window. They provide scroll
support for accessing any card icons that are beyond the immediate viewable
area of the Navigation window frame.
Note: The Navigation window is a dockable window. Double click on the
horizontal grabbers at the top of the window frame to undock the window
and float it within the OTS interface. To redock or return the floating
Navigation window, click and drag it back to the original location, where it
will be repositioned in its original frame.
Summary Icons
Every device has an associated summary represented by a summary icon within
the Navigation Window. Double click on each summary icon for each device
activated to view the
2-24
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Setup Property Menus
When SETUP is selected from the Navigation window by clicking on the SETUP Title bar, icons
for all loaded Transmitter and Receiver cards, in addition to a summary menu, are displayed.
The Setup Property menus provide separate configuration control over each transmitter or
receiver function.
Each Receiver and Transmitter card has a setup menu that pertains to it. If an Receiver (Rx) icon
is clicked, the Receiver setup menu is displayed for the Rx card it relates to. If a Tx icon is
clicked, the Transmitter setup menu is displayed for the selected transmitter icon.
The transmit and receive setup menus may contain multiple menu screens; each selected by a tab.
Each tab represents a category of functionality specific to the transmitter or receiver setup. Every
card has a setup menu that pertains to it.
3. Note the Active Card Title Bar
1. Click on
Setup
2. Click on
the icon
Note: Scroll bars at the bottom and to the right-hand side of the Setup Window allow the
user to scroll when menu information extends beyond the window frame.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Transmitter – Signal
The Signal Property menu of the Transmitter setup, as shown in Figure 2-10, provides the
controls for selecting the Signal setup, Transport overhead, Path overhead, Error insertion, K1,
K2 Decode, IP payload and IP error. In addition, the signal structure and test pattern for both the
active channels and the background channels are configured on this setup menu. Each of the
selections available is described in more detail in the following sections.
Figure 2-10: Transmitter Setup – Signal menu
Signal Standard
Signal Standard selects the operating mode of the transmitter. To select either SONET or SDH
mode, click on the pull-down menu and select the desired operating mode. The operating mode
may also be selected via the menu bar. Click on System – Signal Standard and select either Set
to SONET or Set to SDH.
NOTE: If the signal standard is selected via the menu bar (View>Options), the signal standard is
set for all devices in the system.
2-26
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
BERT Mode
For some modules a third option is available from the Signal Standard menu, the BERT mode.
With this mode, the OTS9100 becomes a BERT generator. The Test Pattern selection for the
active channel is the only valid selection on the transmitter signal setup page when BERT mode
is selected. When the signal standard is returned to either SONET or SDH mode, the settings
will return to the last settings used.
Most LED indicators are invalidated by the BERT mode. The only valid active LEDs are Signal
Present, TSE, and LSS.
Signal Source
Signal Source selects the data source used as the output signal. The modes available are Internal
mode and Through mode.
ꢀ Internal Mode: Internal mode provides an internally-generated 9.95238 Gb/s
signal with the data in a PN7 scrambled NRZ format.
ꢀ Through Mode: If using through mode, the user has the choice of passing a
9.95238 GHz signal through the module in two ways, non-intrusive and intrusive.
Non-intrusive will output an unmodified external signal. Intrusive allows the user to
modify some aspects of the external signal as it passes through the module. To set
the Overhead bytes available for overwriting, refer to the Transport Overhead or
Path Overhead screens.
NOTE: As described in Getting Started, if the modules are not installed into the proper slots,
Through Mode is not available as a signal source option.
Timing Source
The timing source pull-down menu selects either internal or external timing. Internal timing uses
the internal clock. External timing uses the External 155 Clock In connection on the Clock Trig
module.
Trigger Output
The Trigger Output allows the user to select what condition activates the output trigger. Check
the appropriate box for Anomaly Trigger or Defect trigger, or activate both. The triggering on
defects provides an active HIGH for each frame in which a defect is inserted. The triggering on
anomalies provides an active HIGH for each frame in which an anomaly is inserted.
Active Channel(s)
The Active Channel(s) section controls the settings for signal structure and test pattern of the
selected active channel(s). To set the active channel, use the up/down cursors or click the Set
Channel button. When the Set Channel button is clicked, the bar for Active channel changes into
an interactive menu. Type in the text box to select the channel or click Set Channel 1 to choose
channel 1. If the Set All button is clicked, the Background Channels section is grayed out. Set
channel from 1 to 192 or set all.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Signal Structure
Signal structure allows the user to choose the mapping structure of the transmitted signal. The
mapping structures provided are listed in the table below. As shown, the structures all provide
concatenated structures.
SONET
SDH
1 x STS-192c
4 x STS-48c
16 x STS-12c
64 x STS-3c
192 x STS-1
1 x VC4-64c
4 x VC4-16c
16 x VC4-4c
64 x VC4
192 x VC3
Test Pattern
Test Pattern allows the user the select a pattern to fill the chosen active channel of the internally
generated 9.95238 Gb/s signal. The patterns available are:
ꢀ PN15 (PRBS 2^15-1), Inverted PN15 (ITU O.151)
ꢀ PN23 (PRBS 2^23-1), Inverted PN23 (ITU O.151)
ꢀ PN31 (PRBS 2^31-1), Inverted PN31 (ITU O.150)
ꢀ All Zeros
ꢀ All Ones
ꢀ Fixed Data (8-bit)
ꢀ POS (Only valid when Signal Structure is STS-192c/VC-4-64C)
When Fixed Data is selected a button marked Edit Fixed Data is displayed. To change the Fixed
Data to a different value, click the Edit Fixed Data button and type the new value into the text
box beside the button. In the Test Pattern selection box, observe that the value after Fixed Data
changes to match the newly entered value.
Packet Over SONET (POS)
In order to use the POS testing capabilities, POS must be selected as the Active Channel Test
Pattern. Select POS from the drop down menu under Active Channel Test Pattern in the
Receiver Setup menu. The following setup conditions must exist before POS can be selected:
•
•
•
Signal Source is set to Internal.
Timing Source is set to Internal.
Signal Structure is set to STS-192c.
NOTE: To transmit a POS test pattern, the Signal Structure must be set to STS-192c and the
signal source cannot be through mode.
SPE/VC3 Stuff Column Control
The stuff column control allows column 30 and column 59 of the SPE (VC3) to be stuffed with
either all zeros or with the payload pattern. This option is only available if the Signal Structure
is STS-1 or VC3. Set channel from 1 to 192 or set all.
2-28
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Background Channels
The Background Channels section controls the settings for signal structure and test pattern of the
non-active channels.
Signal Structure
Signal structure allows the user to choose the mapping structure for the background channels of
the transmitted signal. The mapping structures provided for background channels are listed in
the table below.
SONET
SDH
1 x STS-192c
4 x STS-48c
16 x STS-12c
64 x STS-3c
192 x STS-1
1 x VC4-64c
4 x VC4-16c
12 x VC4-4c
64 x VC4
192 x VC3
Test Pattern
Test Pattern allows the user to select one of four available patterns to fill the background of the
internally generated 9.95238 Gb/s signal. The default pattern fill is inverted PN23. The patterns
available are:
ꢀ Inverted PN23 (ITU O.151)
ꢀ All Zeros
ꢀ All Ones
ꢀ Fixed Data (8-bit)
When Fixed Data is selected a button marked Edit Fixed Data is displayed. To change the Fixed
Data to a different value, click the Edit Fixed Data button and type the new value into the text
box beside the button. In the Test Pattern selection box, observe that the value after Fixed Data
changes to match the newly entered value.
SPE/VC3 Stuff Column Control
The stuff column control allows column 30 and column 59 of the SPE (VC3) to be stuffed with
either all zeros or with the selected payload pattern. This option is only available if the pattern
Background Signal Structure is STS-1 or VC3.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Transmitter – Transport Overhead
The Transport overhead property menu, as shown in Figure 2-11, can be used to pass or change
the 9.95238 Gb/s signal overhead bytes in the first STS-1 or STM-1 of the OC-192 or STM-64
frame, respectively. In addition, the J0 Trace and S1 byte may be edited. The editing procedure
for each is described in more detail in the following sections.
NOTE: Overhead data displays are in hexadecimal format. All edits to overhead display must be
in hexadecimal format.
Figure 2-11: Transmitter – Transport Overhead menu
2-30
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Edit Overhead
To edit the overhead, click the Edit Overhead button. This brings up a dialog box, shown in
Figure 2-12. The dialog box displays accessible overhead bytes in white while the non-
applicable boxes for the function are grayed out (they do not apply to the selection). The grayed
out bytes are not available for editing. To edit all other bytes, highlight the appropriate box and
type in the desired entry. To set the overhead back to its default state, click the Restore Defaults
button. When editing is complete, click OK to return to the main screen.
Figure 2-12: Edit Overhead dialog box
OTS9100 User Manual
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Through Mode
When using through mode, a number of the overhead bytes may be overwritten as the external
signal passes through the card. This is done through the use of the Through Mode selections
available in the Overhead menu, as shown in Figure 2-13. If the box is checked for Regenerate
B1/B2 Parity, the receiver will recalculate the B1/B2 parity and insert the new information into
the overhead as the signal is passed through the card. To disable B1/B2 parity regeneration,
ensure that the Regenerate B1/B2 Parity box is not selected.
Figure 2-13: Through Mode Overwrite menu
To overwrite an incoming byte, click in the box beside the selection under the Overwrite
Incoming heading. If you wish to keep a byte from being overwritten, make sure the box beside
the selection is not selected. The bytes available to be overwritten are J0 Trace/C1 Byte, E1, F1,
D1..D3 Section DCC, K1..K2 APS, D2..D12 Line DCC, S1 Sync Status, M1, Z2, and E2. Parity
regeneration is always enabled if the user chooses to overwrite any incoming Overhead bytes.
NOTE: There is no explicit byte edit for M1. Checking the M1 overwrite setting provides the ability
to insert REI-L.
2-32
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
J0 Multi-Byte Trace
J0 Trace provides a capability to uniquely identify each of the multiple channels being carried in
a Dense Wave Division Multiplexer (DWDM) system, providing an end-to-end continuity check.
Since only the SONET framing byte plus J0 are in the unscrambled overhead of the SONET
signal, it is possible to extract for display the J0 trace to confirm channel ID.
The OTS9100 has the ability to generate unique J0 traces. This allows test signals to be easily
identified, or to simulate network-element generated traffic without the Trace Identifier
Mismatch (TIM) alarm being generated. The OTS9100 capability to display the received J0 trace
allows users to verify continuity and correct routing of individual channels within the multi-
channel DWDM system.
Figure 2-14: Transmitter J0 Trace dialog box
To edit, click on the Edit J0 Trace button. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-14,
reflecting the current settings of the J0 Trace. Click the appropriate radio button to choose
between No Trace, 16 Byte Trace, and 64 Byte Trace. To input a Trace Value, click in the Trace
Value box and start typing. When edits are complete, click OK to return to the main menu. In
16-byte, the last byte is filled with CRC. In 64-byte, the last two bytes are filled with CR LF.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Transmitter – Path Overhead
The Path overhead property menu, as shown in Figure 2-16, of the Transmitter setup can be used
to pass or change the 9.95238 Gb/s signal path overhead bytes in the first STS-1 or STM-1 of the
OC-192 or STM-64 frame, respectively. In addition, the J1 Trace and C2 path label may be
edited. The editing procedure for each is described in more detail in the following sections.
NOTE: Overhead data displays are in hexadecimal format. All edits to overhead display must be
in hexadecimal format.
Figure 2-16: Transmitter – Path Overhead Property Menu
2-34
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Edit Path Overhead
To edit the path overhead, click the Edit
button. This brings up a Path Overhead
dialog box, shown in Figure 2-17. The
dialog box displays the overhead bytes in
white text boxes. To edit, highlight the
appropriate box and type in the desired
entry. To set the overhead back to its
default state, click the Restore Defaults
button. When editing is complete, click OK
to return to the main screen.
Path Through Mode
When using through mode, a number of the
Path overhead bytes may be overwritten as
the external signal passes through the
module. This is done through the use of the
Through Mode selections available in the
Path Overhead menu, as shown in Figure 2-
18. If the box is checked for Regenerate B3
Parity, the receiver will recalculate the B3
parity and insert the new information into the
overhead as the signal is passed through the module.
To disable B3 parity regeneration, ensure that the
Regenerate B3 Parity box is not selected.
Figure 2-17:
Path Overhead
dialog box
To overwrite an incoming byte, click in the box beside
the selection under the Overwrite Incoming heading.
If you wish to keep a byte from being overwritten,
make sure the box beside the selection is not checked.
The bytes available to be overwritten are J1 Trace, C2,
G1, F2, H4, Z3, Z4, and Z5. B3 parity regeneration is
always enabled if any of the byte or payload overwrite
selections are checked.
NOTE: The Tx Signal
Structure in the Tx
Setup menu must
match the Signal
Structure of the mating
Rx in order for intrinsic
Path Through mode to
operate correctly. If the
Signal Structure of the
Tx does not match the
Signal Structure of the
Rx, the overwritten
bytes will not be
If Overwrite Payload is checked, the payload data is
replaced with the Test Pattern selected on the Signal
page.
accurate. This is also
true for B3
regeneration.
NOTE: There is no explicit byte edit for G1. Checking
the G1 overwrite setting provides the ability to insert
REI-P.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
J1 Multi-Byte Trace
J1 Trace provides a capability to uniquely identify each of the multiple channels being carried in
a Dense Wave Division Multiplexer (DWDM) system, providing an end-to-end continuity check.
It is possible to extract for display the J1 trace to confirm channel ID.
The OTS9100 has the ability to generate unique J1 traces. This allows test signals to be easily
identified, or to simulate network-element generated traffic without the Trace Identifier
Mismatch (TIM) alarm being generated. The OTS9100 capability to display the received J1 trace
allows users to verify continuity and correct routing of individual channels within the multi-
channel DWDM system.
Figure 2-19: Transmitter J1 Trace dialog box
To edit, click on the Edit J1 Trace button. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-19,
reflecting the current settings of the J1 Trace. Click the appropriate radio button to choose
between No Trace, 16 Byte Trace, and 64 Byte Trace. To input a Trace Value, click in the Trace
Value box and start typing. When edits are complete, click OK to return to the main menu. In
16-byte, the last byte is filled with CRC. In 64-byte, the last two bytes are filled with CR LF.
2-36
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Transmitter – Error Insertion
The error insertion menu, as shown in Figure 2-21, of the Transmitter setup allows the user to
inject anomalies and defects.
Figure 2-21: Transmitter Error Insertion menu
The menu is broken into two separate sections:
ꢁ Anomaly Insertion – provides the ability to inject a single anomaly or continuously
inject at a selected rate.
ꢁ Defect Insertion - provides the ability to inject a defect as a single burst or in
continuous insertion
OTS9100 User Manual
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Anomaly Insertion
Figure 2-22: Anomaly Insertion of the Error Insertion menu
The anomaly insertion section of the error insertion menu, as shown in Figure 2-22, provides all
controls for inserting anomalies. The Anomaly Insertion Setup, shown to the left of the example
(Figure 2-22), provide menus for anomaly insertion setup. The Current Anomaly Insertion and
Insertion Control, shown to the right, supply information on the current insertion state and
provide the insertion controls.
To select the type of anomaly injected, use the pull-down menu labeled Type under Anomaly
Insertion Setup. The anomaly types available are B1 BIP, B2 BIP, B3 BIP, MS REI (REI-L),
Payload Bit, Random Bit, REI-P, and Random Bit (SPE only). To choose an anomaly rate, click
on the arrows or highlight and type in the boxes labeled Rate. Or click on the Max Rate button
to inject the maximum rate.
NOTE: For these changes to take place, the Apply Anomaly Setup Changes button must be
clicked. The Current Anomaly Insertion settings will then reflect the new changes.
The ability to insert single B2 anomalies in either the first B2 only or the first B2 in each STM-
n/OC-n structure can also be selected by clicking the appropriate radio button.
To start the anomaly injection, click one of the buttons under Insertion Control.
•
Insert Single – Clicking on this button will inject a single anomaly of the type reflected under
Current Anomaly Insertion.
•
Start Continuous Insertion – Clicking on this button will inject a continuous insertion of the
anomaly type reflected under Current Anomaly Insertion at the indicated rate.
Anomaly Insertion and Through Mode
When inserting an anomaly in through mode, the user must check the appropriate overwrite box
for the anomaly type. For example, to insert a B1 or B2 error, the Regenerate B1/B2 Parity box
must be selected or the error will have no effect. The list of available anomaly types is
dependent upon the overwrite controls enabled. Thus, if no overwrite controls are selected, the
anomaly list will be quite short.
2-38
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Defect Insertion
The Defect Insertion section of the Error Insertion menu, as shown in Figure 2-23, provides all
controls for inserting defects. The Defect Insertion Setup, on the left side, provides menus for
defect insertion setup. The Current Defect Insertion and Insertion Control, on the right side,
supply information on the current insertion state and provide the insertion controls.
Figure 2-23: Defect Insertion of the Error Insertion menu
To select the type of defect injected, use the pull-down menu labeled Type under Defect
Insertion Setup. The defect types available are LOS, LOF, MS AIS (AIS-L), MS RDI (RDI-L),
AIS-P, RDI-P, ERDI-P Payload, ERDI-P Server, ERDI-P Connectivity, and LOP-P. To choose a
defect burst time, click on the arrows or highlight and type in the boxes labeled Burst.
NOTE: For these changes to take place, the Apply Defect Setup Changes button must be clicked.
The Current Defect Insertion settings will then reflect the new changes.
To start the defect insertion, click one of the buttons under Insertion Control.
•
Insert a Burst – Clicking on this button will inject a single burst of the defect type reflected
under Current Defect Insertion.
•
Start Continuous Insertion – Clicking on this button will continuously inject the defect type
reflected under Current Defect Insertion.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Transmitter – K1, K2 Decode
The K1, K2 Decode menu, as shown in Figure 2-24, of the Transmitter setup allows the user to
edit the K1 and K2 bytes for Automatic Protection Switching (APS) measurements.
Figure 2-24: Transmitter – K1, K2 Decode menu
To edit, click the Edit K1,K2 Bytes button. This brings up a dialog box, shown in Figure 2-25.
The dialog box displays the current K1,K2 settings and allows the option to edit the byte via
hexadecimal or symbolic form (a subset of 0x00...0xFF).
2-40
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Figure 2-25: Edit K1, K2 Bytes dialog box
For K1, type in the channel being set and click on the Request pull-down menu to select the new
value. The values available from the pull-down menu are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
(0) No Request
(1) Do Not Revert
(2) Reverse Request
(3) Unused
(4) Exercise
(5) Unused
(6) Wait to Restore
(7) Unused
(8) Manual Switch
(9) Unused
(10) Signal Degrade, Low Priority
(11) Signal Degrade, High Priority
(12) Signal Fail, Low Priority
(13) Signal Fail, High Priority
(14) Forced Switch
(15) Lockout of Position
For K2, type in the bridged channel being set then use the pull-down menus to select the
architecture and mode. The values available from the architecture pull-down menu are:
•
•
(0) 1 + 1
(1) 1 + N
OTS9100 User Manual
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
The values available from the mode pull-down menu are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
(0) Idle
(1) Bridged
(2) Bridged and Switched
(3) Not Used (Span)/Ext TR (Ring)
(4) Unidirectional
(5) Bidirectional
(6) RDI-L
(7) AIS-L
2-42
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Transmitter - IP Payload
The new Packet Over SONET (POS) feature characterizes physical layer performance of SONET
and SDH equipment by generating and measuring IP traffic.
Specifically, the POS feature provides the ability to determine physical layer operating limits
based on IP QoS. For instance, the sensitivity of IP routers to received laser power, optical jitter
tolerace, degraded Signal to noise, and frequency offset can be determined using IP
measurements.
The principle benefit of this additional feature is confidence that IP QoS is not preturbed by
conforming physical layer degradations. The POS feature is not intended to be a comprehensive
IP QoS tester but to enhance physical layer testing.
Figure 2-26: IP Header Menu
The IP Payload menu consists of property controls for Traffic, IP Header Setup, POS
Scrambling, IP Payload and Interframe Gap. To edit the IP Header click on the Edit IP Header
button. Drop down menus included in this menu allow the user to set specific properties.
IP Setup
The IP Payload data-gram starts with the IP header. The user can set the source and destination
IP addresses. The access to these fields is through the Edit IP Header button, as described in the
next section. The identification field of each data-gram contains a 16-bit number that is
incremented by one for each. The sequence does not restart but continues from one packet to the
next. The IP Setup area identifies the sequence and packet information.
POS Scrambling can be set to ON or OFF via the pull down menu.
The IP Payload is selectable by the pull down menu. The selections available are:
ꢀ PRBS 31
ꢀ 16-bit Word, user-selectable
If the 16-bit Word is selected, an EDIT button and selection box is displayed.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
The Interframe Gap is fixed at 16. Traffic can be stopped or started by clicking the button in the
Traffic section.
IP Header
To edit the IP Header click the button
to display the Edit IP Header dialog
box, as shown in Figure 2-27.
The grayed out areas of the dialog
box are fixed data not selectable by
the user. The user can modify the
information in the white boxes.
To modify the information, click in
the box and type in the new selection.
The IP Source Address contains a
four-byte (32-bit) with IPv4 Internet
address. This address identifies the
original source of the packets.
The IP Destination Address contains
a four-byte (32-bit) with IPv4 Internet
address. This address identifies the
final destination of the packets.
Figure 2-27: Edit Menu for IP Header
2-44
OTS9100 User manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Transmitter - IP Error Insertion
The IP Error Insertion Property menu consists of property controls for Stream Index, Error
Selection, Error Type, Error Rate, Minimum. Rate, Maximum. Rate, and Current Error Insertion
display drop down menus supply other options for each category.
Figure 2-28: IP Error Insertion Menu
The Stream Index is fixed at a value of 1.
The Current Error Insertion section is only available if there is an Error Type selected under the
Error Selection area.
Error Selection
The Error Type is selected by using the pull down menu. The Error Types available include:
•
•
•
•
None
HDLC FCS Error
IP Payload Error
IP Header Checksum Error
Once the error type is selected, the Error Rate must be selected. Use the up/down cursors or just
type in the rate. For the maximum rate, click the Max Rate button.
The default setting for error type is None so before the Current Error Insertion menu is available,
an error type must be selected and applied.
NOTE: The Apply Changes button must be clicked before the changes become active.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Current Error Insertion
The Current Error Insertion menu is only available when the error type applied is an actual error
type and not the default no error setting. The Current Error Insertion menu identifies the current
error type and error rate selected.
If the Insert Single button is clicked, a single error is inserted into the IP Payload. If the Start
Continuous Insertion button is clicked, errors are continuously inserted into the IP Payload. The
button changes to say Stop Insertion and ACTIVE is displayed in the Current Error Insertion
menu area.
To stop the error insertion, click the Stop Insertion button. The active notice is no longer
displayed and the button name returns to Start Continuous Insertion.
2-46
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Receiver – Signal
The signal menu of the Receiver setup, as shown in Figure 2-26, allows the user to set the signal
standard and structure, the active channel, the test pattern, and the output pulse trigger. This
menu also indicates the current value of the receiver threshold offset. Drop down menus provide
other choices for test analysis. Each of the selections available is described in more detail in the
following sections.
Figure 2-26: Receiver Setup - Signal menu
Signal Standard
Signal Standard selects the operating mode of the receiver. To select either SONET or SDH
mode, click on the pull-down menu and select the desired operating mode. The operating mode
may also be selected via the menu bar. Click on System – Signal Standard and select either Set
to SONET or Set to SDH.
NOTE: If the signal standard is selected via the menu bar (View>Options), the signal standard is
set for all devices in the system.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
BERT Mode
For some modules there is a third option available from the Signal Standard menu, the BERT
mode. With this mode, the OTS9100 becomes a BERT generator. The Test Pattern selection for
the active channel is the only valid selection on the transmitter signal setup page when BERT
mode is selected. When the signal standard is returned to either SONET or SDH mode, the
settings will return to the current selections in the setup menus.
Most LED indicators are also invalidated by the BERT mode. The only valid LEDs are Signal
Present, TSE, and LSS.
Signal Structure
Signal structure allows the user to choose the mapping structure of the received signal. The
mapping structures provided are listed in the table below. As shown, the structures all provide
concatenated structures.
SONET
SDH
1 x STS-192c
4 x STS-48c
16 x STS-12c
64 x STS-3c
192 x STS-1
1 x VC4-64c
2 x VC4-16c
16 x VC4-4c
64 x VC4
192 x VC3
Active Channel(s)
The Active Channel(s) section controls the settings for signal structure and test pattern of the
selected active channel(s). To set the active channel, use the up/down cursors or click the Set
Channel button. When the Set Channel button is clicked, the bar for Active channel changes into
an interactive menu. Type in the text box to select the channel or click Set Channel 1 to choose
channel 1.
Test Pattern
Test Pattern allows the user the select a pattern to fill the chosen active channel of the internally
generated 9.95238 Gb/s signal. The patterns available are:
ꢀ PN15 (PRBS 2^15-1), Inverted PN15 (ITU O.151)
ꢀ PN23 (PRBS 2^23-1), Inverted PN23 (ITU O.151)
ꢀ PN31 (PRBS 2^31-1), Inverted PN31 (ITU O.150)
ꢀ All Zeros
ꢀ All Ones
ꢀ Fixed Data (8-bit)
In order to use the POS testing capabilities, POS must be selected as the Active Channel Test
Pattern. In addition, POS must be selected as the Active Channel Test Pattern in the Receiver
Setup menu.
NOTE: To receive a POS test pattern, the Signal Structure must be set to
STS-192c.
2-48
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
When Fixed Data is selected a button marked Edit Fixed Data is displayed. To change the Fixed
Data to a different value, click the Edit Fixed Data button and type the new value into the text
box beside the button. In the Test Pattern selection box, observe that the value after Fixed Data
changes to match the newly entered value.
SPE/VC3 Stuff Column Control
The stuff column control allows column 30 and column 59 of the SPE (VC3) to be stuffed with
either all zeros or with the payload pattern. This option is only available if the pattern is STS-1
or VC3.
Trigger Output
The Trigger Output allows the user to select what condition activates the output trigger. Check
the appropriate box for Anomaly, Defect, or Payload trigger, or activate all three. Triggering on
defects provides an active HIGH for each frame in which a defect is inserted. Triggering on
anomalies provides an active HIGH for each frame in which an anomaly is inserted. Triggering
on anomalies provides an active HIGH for every occurring TSE error.
Receiver Threshold Offset
The Receiver Threshold Offset provides a means to change the decision point of the signal eye.
The decision point is the point at which the signal is declared a one or a zero. The receiver
threshold offset allows the user to shift this decision point changing the offset. This ability is
useful during Q-factor analysis and accelerated BER testing.
To edit, click the Edit Rx Threshold Offset button, which then displays the Receiver threshold
offset dialog box as shown in Figure 2-27.
Figure 2-27: Receiver Threshold Offset dialog box
The current value of the receiver threshold offset is displayed in the upper left-hand corner under
the Current Value heading. The available range is shown in the right-hand corner. To change
the threshold offset, click and drag the slide bar then click Apply. The Current Value should
change to match the new value.
NOTE: The new value will not take affect until Apply is clicked. If the slide bar is changed but
Apply is not clicked, the Current Value will not change.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Receiver – Trace Mismatch
The trace mismatch menu of the Receiver setup, as shown in Figure 2-28, provides the setup
information for the J0/J1 Trace, C2 Status, and HP Detection. Each of the selections available is
described in more detail in the following sections.
Figure 2-28: Receiver Setup – Trace Mismatch menu
J0 Multi-Byte Trace
J0 Trace provides a capability to uniquely identify each of the multiple channels being carried in
a Dense Wave Division Multiplexer (DWDM) system, providing an end-to-end continuity check.
The OTS9100 has the ability to generate unique J0 traces. This allows test signals to be easily
identified, or to simulate network-element generated traffic without the Trace Identifier
Mismatch (TIM) alarm being generated. The OTS9100 capability to display the received J0 trace
allows users to verify continuity and correct routing of individual channels within the multi-
channel DWDM system.
To analyze, ensure the box beside the Analyze J0 Trace Mismatch is checked.
To edit, click on the Edit Expected J0 Trace button. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 2-29, reflecting the current settings of the J0 Trace. Click the appropriate radio button to
choose between No Trace, 16 Byte Trace, and 64 Byte Trace. To input a Trace Value, click in
2-50
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
the Trace Value box and start typing. When the desired edits are complete, click OK to return to
the main menu. In 16-byte, the last byte is filled with CRC. In 64-byte, the last two bytes are
filled with CR LF.
Figure 2-29: J0 Trace Editor dialog box
J1 Multi-Byte Trace
J1 Trace provides a capability to uniquely identify each of the multiple channels being carried in
a Dense Wave Division Multiplexer (DWDM) system, providing an end-to-end continuity check.
To analyze, ensure the box beside the Analyze J1 Trace Mismatch is checked.
To edit, click on the Edit Expected J1 Trace button. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 2-30, reflecting the current settings of the J1 Trace. Click the appropriate radio button to
choose between No Trace, 16 Byte Trace, and 64 Byte Trace. To input a Trace Value, click in
the Trace Value box and start typing. In 16-byte, the last byte is filled with CRC. In 64-byte, the
last two bytes are filled with CR LF.
Figure 2-30: J1 Trace Editor dialog box
Edit C2 Byte
OTS9100 User Manual
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
The C2 byte is the Path Signal label. The C2 byte can be any value from 0x00 to 0xFF and may
be set in hexadecimal or symbolic form.
To edit, click the Edit Expected C2 button. This brings up a dialog box, shown in Figure 2-31.
The dialog box displays the current C2 setting and allows the option to edit the byte via
hexadecimal or symbolic form (a subset of 0x00...0xFF).
Figure 2-31: Edit C2 dialog box
To change the setting, click the radio button for Symbolic or Hex (hexadecimal). Type in the
text box by the Hex heading to input a new value or click on the Symbolic button and click on
the pull-down menu. The values available from the pull-down menu are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
(00) Unequipped
(01) Equipped – Nonspecific
(02) VT-Structured STS-1 SPE
(03) Locked VT Mode
(04) Asynchronous Mapping for DS3
(12) Asynchronous Mapping for DS4NA
(13) Mapping for ATM
(14) Mapping for DQDB
(15) Asynchronous Mapping for FDDI
(16) HDLC-Over-SONET Mapping
(FE) O.181 Test Signal (TSS1 to TSS3) Mapping
(FF) Reserved
2-52
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
HPPLM and HP Unequipped Detection
If Anaylysis Path Label Mismatch box is checked the Detect any Mismatch and Detect Signal
Label Mismatch per GR253 Table 6-2 boxes are enabled and Path Label Mismatch is analyzed,
otherwise the boxes are disabled and Label Mismatch will not be analyzed.
For the HP Unequipped Detection section, if the box is checked, the Unequipped High Path is
analyzed.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Receiver – IP Setup
The IP Setup menu of the Receiver setup, as shown in Figure 2-6, provides the IP setup
information. Each of the selections available is described in more detail in the following
sections.
Figure 2-6: Receiver Setup – IP Setup menu
The Stream Index is fixed at a value of 1.
IP Setup
The IP Payload data-gram starts with the IP header.
POS Scrambling can be set to ON or OFF via the pull down menu.
The IP Payload is selectable by the pull down menu. The selections available are:
ꢀ PRBS 31
ꢀ 16-bit Word, user-selectable
If the 16-bit Word is selected, an EDIT button and selection box is displayed.
2-54
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Setup - Summary
The Setup Summary menu, as shown in Figure 2-32, provides a summary of the setup conditions
for each Transmitter and Receiver individually. Clicking on the Turn Laser OFF buttons will
turn the laser off. Clicking on the Receiver Setup will display the Receiver Setup menu for the
specific Receiver number chosen. Clicking on the Transmitter Setup will display the last edited
menu tab of the Transmitter Setup menu for the specific Transmitter number chosen.
Figure 2-32: Setup Summary menu
OTS9100 User Manual
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Signal Monitor Menus
When Signal Monitor is selected from the Navigation window, icons for all loaded Receiver
modules are displayed. The Signal Monitor menu provides separate configuration control over
each receiver by these individual icons.
If an Rx icon is clicked, the Receiver signal monitor menu is displayed. This menu contains four
separate menu screens; each selected by a tab. These tabs, Transport Overhead, Path Overhead,
K1,K2 Decode, and Payload, each display an aspect of the Signal Monitor function.
Receiver – Transport Overhead
The transport overhead menu, as shown in Figure 2-33, displays the current activity of the
transport overhead as monitored by the selected receiver. The Section Trace (J0) and the S1
Synchronization Status provide additional information received.
Figure 2-33: Signal Monitor – Transport Overhead
The Transport Overhead section displays the overhead for the selected STM-1/STS-3. The
information presented on the screen is constantly updated. To suspend the update, click the
Pause Update button. The button will change to a Resume Update button and will say
“PAUSED” beside it, as shown in Figure 2-34. The display will not be updated again until the
Resume Update button is clicked.
NOTE: Pausing the update only suspends the local display updates, the OTS9100 is still
capturing data.
NOTE: The title at the top of the menu reflects the overhead in the mode of the selected receiver,
not the notation selected through the options menu.
2-56
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
RS Trace (Section Trace) (J0)
The Section Trace (J0) provides the current values of the J0 multi-byte trace. The 16-byte J0
Trace receives 15 bytes ending with a CRC. The 64-byte J0 Trace receives 62 bytes with CR LF.
The Expected and Received values are both displayed, providing an easy visual comparison of
the J0 Trace. The length of the Trace is also provided as both expected and received values.
S1 Synchronization Status
S1 Synchronization Status displays the S1 byte values. The S1 byte values are decoded and
displayed in ASCII format. To edit the S1 byte, go to the Overhead section of the Transmitter
setup and enter the desired hexadecimal value.
The S1 byte display is only active when the overhead channel is set to 1.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Receiver – Path Overhead
The path overhead menu, as shown in Figure 2-35, displays the current activity of the path
overhead as monitored by the selected receiver. The Path Trace (J1) and the C2 Status provide
additional information received.
Figure 2-35: Signal Monitor – Path Overhead
The Path Overhead section displays the overhead for the selected STM-1/STS-3. The
information presented on the screen is constantly updated. To suspend the update, click the
Pause Update button. The button will change to a Resume Update button and will say
“PAUSED” beside it. The display will not be updated again until the Resume Update button is
clicked.
NOTE: Pausing the update only suspends the local display updates, the OTS9100 is still
capturing data.
The listed channel refers to the active channel of the receiver. Only the active channel payload
can be monitored. To change this display, change the active channel in the receiver signal menu
setup.
2-58
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Path Trace (J1)
The Path Trace (J1) provides the current values of the J1 multi-byte trace. The 16-byte J1 Trace
receives 15 bytes ending with a CRC. The 64-byte J1 Trace receives 62 bytes with CR LF. The
Expected and Received values are both displayed, providing an easy visual comparison of the J1
Trace. The length of the Trace is also provided as both expected and received values.
C2 Status
C2 Status displays the received and expected C2 byte values. The C2 byte value is decoded and
displayed in ASCII format. To edit the C2 byte, go to the Path Overhead section of the
Transmitter setup and enter the desired hexadecimal value.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Receiver – K1,K2 Decode
The K1,K2 Decode signal monitor screen, as shown in Figure 2-36, displays the received results
of the K1, K2 bytes.
Figure 2-36: Signal Monitor – K1,K2 Decode
2-60
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Receiver – Payload
The Payload signal monitor screen, as shown in Figure 2-37, provides a graphical representation
of the signal structure of the system. The system analyzes the incoming signal and displays the
configuration. Any of the structures can be clicked and the identifying information for that
channel is displayed.
Figure 2-37: Signal Monitor – Payload
OTS9100 User Manual
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Test Control Menu
When Test Control is selected from the Navigation window, the Test Control menu is displayed,
as shown in Figure 2-38. The Test Control menu allows the user to choose the type of test to run
and the time the test will run.
Figure 2-38: Test Control Menu
The Current Test section describes the state of the current test and the time of the current test.
The Test Control section provides the current test mode and provides an edit box for the user to
include a description of the current test. To edit the test control settings, click on the Edit Test
Control Settings button. The Test Parameters dialog box, shown in Figure 2-39, is now
displayed.
2-62
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
The Test Mode section enables the user to set continuous, timed, or timed-repetitive tests. The
Continuous setting configures the test cycle so that it will run continuously from the time that the
Start button is clicked until the Stop button is clicked. The Timed setting configures the test
cycle to run the test for the duration of the test time. The Timed-Repetitive setting configures the
test cycle to run the test for the duration of the test time and then to repeat the same test again. To
choose the Test Mode click the appropriate radio button.
Figure 2-39: Test Control Parameters dialog box
The Test Duration section provides the means to set the length of the test if the Timed or Timed-
Repetitive tests were chosen. To set the test duration select the desired test length time by
clicking up/down arrows in the Days, Hours, Minutes, and Seconds boxes.
By clicking in the box labeled Test Description, a description of the test may be entered. When
editing is finished, click OK to return to the Test Control menu.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Test Control Summary
The Test Control Summary menu, as shown in Figure 2-40, provides a summary of the test
control conditions for each Receiver individually. Clicking the Edit button will display the Test
Control menu for the specific receiver number chosen. Clicking the Start button will begin a test
on the specific receiver number chosen. Once the Start button is clicked, it changes to a Stop
button. The Pause button is grayed out until a test is started, then it may be clicked to pause a
test.
Figure 2-40: Test Control Summary menu
2-64
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Measurements Menu
When Measurements is selected from the Navigation window, the Measurements menu is
displayed. The Measurements menu provides separate configuration control over each receiver
through associated icons.
If an Rx icon is clicked, the Receiver signal monitor menu is displayed. This menu contains
separate menu screens; each selected by a tab. These tabs, each display an aspect of the Receiver
Measurement function.
Receiver - Real-Time
The Real-Time menu has four tab selections provided as property page display choices: Real-
Time, Cumulative, History and IP Measurements. The real-time display menu provides the
ability to view the errored seconds, error counts, and error ratios for each error condition
monitored during the last n seconds (up to sixty). There is a Section and Line View, a Path View
and a Selected View. If Selected is chosen, a window is displayed, which allow the user to select
four error measurements.
Figure 2-41: Real-Time menu – Section and Line display
OTS9100 User Manual
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Figure 2-42: Real-Time menu – Path display
Figure 2-42: Real-Time menu – Selected display
2-66
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Receiver - Cumulative
The cumulative menu has two selections on the top for Display choices, Section and Line, and
Path. The cumulative display menu provides a summary of the errored seconds, error counts, and
error ratios for each error condition monitored during the test. The results are accumulated while
the test is in progress and are cleared when a new test begins. The measurements shown reflect
the display choice, as shown in Figures 2-44 and 2-45.
Figure 2-44: Cumulative Measurements Display – Section and Line
OTS9100 User Manual
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Figure 2-45: Cumulative Measurements Display - Path
2-68
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Receiver – History
The history display shows the results history data collected by the associated receiver during the current
or most recent test, as shown in Figures 2-46 and 2-47. The selections for display choices are
Section/Line and Path.
Figure 2-46: Example of Results History Data – Section/Line
OTS9100 User Manual
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Figure 2-47: Example of Results History Data –Path
The upper window shows a trace for each measurement parameter. A dark rectangle is shown for a
measurement interval during which an errored second occurred (LOS, LOF, LOP, SEF/OOF, TIM, AIS,
RDI, PLM, UNEQ, LSS) or one or more errors were counted (B1, B2, B3, FAS, REI, BIT/TSE).
The lower window shows a bar-graph display (B1, B2, FAS, REI) of the anomaly selected by
the Detail View selector. The display may be linear or logarithmic, and is automatically scaled
based on the maximum value for that parameter.
The Zoom Out/In slider sets the display’s time axis. The limits are 1 second/tick to 1 hour/tick.
The display and the detail view scale are set accordingly.
The Scroll bar scrolls the display horizontally.
The display Time Axis may be set to show elapsed test time or time of day. Elapsed test time
does not accrue when a test is paused; time of day continues.
The Cursor, shown as a colored line on the display, identifies a particular measurement sample.
It may be positioned in several ways:
ꢁ Incrementally, by moving it with the four Cursor buttons
ꢁ Directly, by clicking the mouse in one of the data windows.
ꢁ Directly, by entering a time value in the Cursor field and clicking the Set button.
When the Time Axis display is set to Elapsed Time, the cursor position may be entered:
ꢁ In seconds, e.g., 135
ꢁ In hours:minutes:seconds, e.g., 2:15 or 0:2:15
ꢁ In days, hours, minutes, seconds, e.g., 3d 4h 2m 15s
2-70
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
If the first character of the time specification is a plus (+) or minus (–) sign, the time is taken
relative to the current cursor position.
When the Time Axis display is set to Time of Day, times are taken as time-of-day; day
specifications are relative to 0, the first day of the test. Thus, 1:00 PM on the day following the
start of the test would be entered as 1d 13:00:00.
The Live Update check box causes the data display to track new data as a test is running. When
it is set, the cursor is automatically positioned on the most recently acquired sample and the
windows scroll accordingly. Moving the cursor automatically turns off this feature.
When the Zoom Out/In slider is set to a resolution other than the finest, the display may be
automatically zoomed by clicking the mouse at one edge of the area of interest, holding down
the left button, and dragging it to the other edge. The zoom setting and scroll position will adjust
to show the selected area at the highest resolution possible.
The Test window shows the test start time and date, elapsed time, and test state.
The Data at Cursor window shows the cursor position (elapsed time or time-of-day, as
selected), the count of the selected parameter at the cursor, and the maximum value for that
parameter at the current display resolution.
The Search controls allow searching, forward or backward, for an occurrence of the specified
parameter. The search starts from the cursor location; it will not wrap beyond the end (forward)
or beginning (backward) of the data. For the B1, B2, FAS, MS-REI (REI-L), B3, REI-P, and
TSE parameters, one may specify a search threshold: the search will find only intervals
containing at least that many errors.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Receiver – IP Measurements
When Measurements is selected from the Navigation window, the Measurements menu is
displayed. If a Receiver icon is clicked, the Receiver Measurements menu is displayed. This
menu contains four separate menu screens; each selected by a tab. These tabs, Real-Time,
Cumulative, History, and IP Measurements, each display an aspect of the Receiver Measurement
function.
The IP Measurements screen, as shown in Figure 2-7, provides the measurement results of the
HDLC Frames and the IP Packets/Bytes.
Figure 2-7: Receiver IP Measurements display
The IP Packets section results are only updated for HDLC frames with correct FCS. Within the
IP Packets, the payload is only verified for packets with a valid header checksum. Packets with
No Errors are packets with correct FCS, valid header checksum, and no IP payload errors.
2-72
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Transmitter - IP Measurements
When Measurements is selected from the Navigation window, the Measurements menu is
displayed. If a transmitter icon is clicked, the Transmitter Measurements menu is displayed.
This menu, as shown in Figure 2-8, provides summary results of the transmitted HDLC Frames
and the IP Packets transmitted and transmitted with errors.
NOTE: Traffic has to be started to get statistics.
Figure 2-8: Transmitter IP Measurements display
In the Transmitter IP Packets section, Packets with errors is the total of the errors for the IP
header checksum and payload. Only one error type may be inserted at a time.
The Good IP Packets count is performed prior to FCS computation. Introducing FCS errors
results in a mismatch between the transmitter and receiver IP Good packets results. This is due
to the fact that the receiver does not process IP datagrams with incorrect FCS.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Analysis Menu
When the Analysis Category bar is selected from the Navigation window, and an icon chosen,
the Analysis properties menu associated with that device icon is displayed. The results are
accumulated while the test runs and are cleared when a new test begins.
The Analysis property menu contains two separate menu screens; each selected by a tab. These
tabs, SONET/T1M1 and SDH/G.826, each display an aspect of the Receiver Analysis function.
Analysis – SONET/T1M1
The SONET/T1M1 menu has two selections provided for Analysis Results; Section/Line and
Path. Click either one to display the SONET analysis results for that selection. The display
reflects the available Near End and Far End error count analysis data, as shown in Figures 2-48
and 2-49. The analysis data is explained in greater detail below.
Figure 2-48: Analysis menu – SONET/T1M1 Section/Line
2-74
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Figure 2-49: Analysis menu – SONET/T1M1 Path
The error count and the error ratio are both displayed when applicable. The results are broken
down separately into Section, Line, and Path results. Each item of the analysis results is briefly
described as follows.
CV – Code Violations are counted per ITU-T G.826 and GR-253-CORE specifications.
BBE – Background block errors are the count of errored blocks during non-severely errored
seconds.
ES – Errored Seconds are the number of seconds since testing was started (or restarted) in
which one or more errors were detected. Errored seconds are only counted during available time.
SES – Severely Errored Seconds are counted per ITU-T G.826 and GR-253-CORE
specifications. Severely errored seconds are only counted during available time.
UAS – Unavailable Seconds are the number of seconds during which error performance was
such that the received signal was deemed to be unavailable. Transition into and out of the
unavailable state is evaluated according to ITU-T G.826 and GR-253-CORE standards.
CSES – Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds are the count of consecutive severely errored
second periods. A CSES period is defined as a period of more than 2, but less than 10,
consecutive SES.
ESA – Errored Second Type A is a second in which a single anomaly was detected.
ESB – Errored Second Type B is a second in which there was more than one anomaly, but
fewer than the threshold for declaration of a Severely Errored Second.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Analysis – SDH/G.826
The SDH/G.826 menu has two selections on the top for Analysis Results; RS/MS and Path.
Click either choice to display the SDH analysis results for the selection. The display reflects the
available Near End and Far End error count analysis data, as shown in Figures 2-50 and 2-51.
The analysis data is explained in greater detail below.
Figure 2-50: Analysis menu – SDH/G.826 RS/MS
2-76
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Figure 2-51: Analysis menu – SDH/G.826 Path
The error count and the error ratio are both displayed when applicable. The results are broken
down separately into Section, Line, and Path results. Each item of the analysis results is briefly
described as follows.
EB – Errored Blocks are counted per ITU-T G.826 and GR-253-CORE specifications.
BBE – Background block errors are the count of errored blocks during non-severely errored
seconds.
ES – Errored Seconds are the number of seconds since testing was started (or restarted) in
which one or more errors were detected. Errored seconds are only counted during available time.
SES – Severely Errored Seconds are counted per ITU-T G.826 and GR-253-CORE
specifications. Severely errored seconds are only counted during available time.
UAS – Unavailable Seconds are the number of seconds during which error performance was
such that the received signal was deemed to be unavailable. Transition into and out of the
unavailable state is evaluated according to ITU-T G.826 and GR-253-CORE standards.
CSES – Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds are the count of consecutive severely errored
second periods. A CSES period is defined as a period of more than 2, but less than 10,
consecutive SES.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
APS Measurements Menu
When APS Category bar is selected from the Navigation window, and an icon chosen, the APS
Measurements property menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-52. This menu controls setup,
implementation, and results viewing of the APS Duration Counter test.
Figure 2-52: APS Measurements menu
The Automatic Protection Switching (APS) duration counter test verifies that the system
performs APS switching in an expected manner. There are three parameters that require setup
before the test is activated. To set, click the Edit Test Parameters button to display the Set APS
Test Parameters dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-53.
2-78
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Figure 2-53: Set APS Test Parameters dialog box
The Condition Tested selects the condition that triggers an APS switch. The test will not begin
until this condition occurs and it will end when the last condition occurs. The conditions
available are SEF/OOF, LOS, B1, B2, B3, TSE, AIS-L, AIS-P, RDI-L, and RDI-P and Optical
LOS (only available if using an OTS91L4, OTS91L6 or OTS91L7 Optical card).
The Test Time Limit defines the time the test will run AFTER the first condition occurs. Once
the first condition occurs, the Test Time Limit starts and ends the test once the limit is reached.
To set the limit, click in the text box and enter the new limit, up to one minute.
The Switch Time Threshold is the test limit. The APS switch time (entered as usec) is the time
elapsed between the first condition occurrence and the last condition occurrence. If the time
between these two events exceeds the Switch Time Threshold, the test fails. If the time is within
the Switch Time Threshold, the test passes. To set this threshold, click in the text box and enter
the new threshold.
The Conditions Found area of the menu lists any non-Condition Tested errors that occurred
during the Switch Time Threshold.
To start the test, click the Start APS Test button.
NOTE: When the test is begun the Test Active status button will light. The test does not actually
start until the first Condition occurs. For example, if the AIS-L is the selected Condition Tested,
the Test Time Limit will not trigger until the first AIS-L error occurs. At that point, whether it be five
minutes or five hours after the start test button was clicked, the Test Time Limit will trigger and the
test will begin.
To copy the test results, click the Copy Results to Clipboard button. A dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 2-54, which allows annotations to be added to the results file and provides the
file for viewing. Once OK is clicked, the results are copied to the clipboard and can be pasted
into another application or document from there by typing CTRL+V.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Status Button is lit.
Figure 2-54: Copy APS Measurement Data dialog box
2-80
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Remote Access Setups
The remote control settings for selecting GPIB, RS-232, and Ethernet LAN controls are located
under the menu bar in the System menu. Click on the System menu and select Remote Control.
The Remote Control Settings dialog box is displayed. Across the top are tabs for GPIB, COM1,
COM2, and Telnet, as shown in Figures 2-63, 2-64, and 2-65.
To set up the proper configurations for the type of remote access desired, select the appropriate
setup information via the pull-down menus and boxes provided.
Figure 2-63: GPIB Remote Control Settings
Figure 2-56: COM 1/COM 2 Remote Control Settings
OTS9100 User Manual
2-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Figure 2-57: Telnet (network) Remote Control Settings
Select Server
The select server dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-58, allows the user to select the server when
the OTS system is networked. If there are no networks available, the only selection is
LocalServer.
Figure 2-58: Select Server dialog box
2-82
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
View Options
To open the options menu, as shown in Figure 2-59, click View and select Options. The options
menu allows the user to customize the user interface to their preferences.
Figure 2-59: View Options dialog box
Display Notation
Since SONET and SDH provide different notation in regards to some measurements, the display
notation option allows the user to set the notation to their choice. If SONET is selected, then
where applicable, all notation will be in SONET. If SDH is selected, then where applicable, all
notation will be in SDH.
NOTE: This switch does not affect the actual functionality of the module. It affects only the
notation on the user interface for viewing convenience.
If the ‘Track Module Setting’ option is selected, then the display notation follows that of the
module setting. For example, if the module is set to SONET mode, then SONET notation is
displayed.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Server (System)
The server selections allow the user to restore connection to the server at startup and to change
the quantity displayed in the recent connection list. These server connections refer to the
specific OTS system.
Display Configuration
Display configuration provides two different display sizes, 800x600 and 1024x768.
NOTE: For viewing on the OTS9010, the 800x600 display is recommended. Otherwise, the whole
screen will only be viewable with the use of scrollbars.
2-84
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
System View
A system view is available by clicking View and selecting System View. This view, as shown in Figure
2-62, represents all modules currently installed in the OTS system. The System View reflects the name
of each card and its slot position. This feature is provided as a reference for proper module installation
and connections for multiple modules. The screen may also be reached by pressing CTRL-Y on the
keyboard.
Figure 2-62: System View
OTS9100 User Manual
2-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
SCPI Output
The SCPI Output option is provided for use in programming remote commands. To activate,
click on the View menu and select SCPI Output. A dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-63, is
displayed which provides an echo for all commands performed via the user interface. The
commands are shown in SCPI format and may be copied from the dialog box into a text
document.
Figure 2-63: View SCPI Output dialog box
NOTE: If the OTS system contains different module types (for example, OTS91T2 and OTS93T1
cards) all shared remote commands must include a slot designation. If the slot number is not
included, the system will return an error message stating that a slot number is required.
2-86
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Results Files
Every time a test is started, data files are generated. These files are stored on the C-drive in a
folder marked ‘Tektronix Measurement Data’. To view these files from the user interface, click
on View and select ‘Test Results Files’. The Results Viewer dialog box is displayed. Refer to
the Results Viewer description in this section for further information.
Results File Management
As tests are run measurement data files accumulate in the ‘Tektronix Measurement Data’ folder.
Once this folder becomes large from the quantity and size of the files, overall system
performance will suffer. The OTS system provides a results file cleanup tool to assist in
automatically managing these files.
NOTE: By default the system will keep only the most recent 100 results files. If there is a need to
preserve all results files the user must explicitly disable results file cleanup before any tests are
run.
To access the Results File Management tool, click on the Systems menu and select Results File
Management. The Results File Deletion Parameters dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
2-64.
All cleanup parameters may be independently enabled or disabled by modifying the check box to
the left of the relevant parameter. Disabled parameters will retain their prior settings while
disabled. The value fields for disabled will be grayed out indicating that the relevant limit is not
being checked. All changes to parameters do not take effect until the ‘OK’ button is pressed.
The overall cleanup process is controlled by the pair of radio buttons at the top of the dialog. If
the ‘Disabled’ button is selected then all results file cleanup will be turned off.
Results file cleanup is accomplished in two steps. The first step selects files to be moved or
deleted. Results file sets (a history file and a summary file) are processed from oldest to newest
based on the setting of the ‘Delete files by oldest’ control. This allows files to be selected based
on their creation time, last modification time or last accessed time. Files are added to the
delete/move list until all enabled criteria have been met.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Figure 2-64: Results File Management dialog box
The cleanup facility allows files to be moved or removed based on their absolute age, the total
number of files present or the total size of the files (either in absolute megabytes or as a
percentage of the total capacity of the disk). The age of a file is determined based on the ‘Delete
files by oldest’ setting. The number of files present counts ‘sets’ of results data (a summary file
and its associated history file count as one ‘results file set’).
When enough files have been added to the list to meet all enabled limits the indicated files are
either deleted or moved to the indicated directory. If processing of a given file fails (possibly
due to file permissions or the destination directory being unavailable) processing of files will
proceed through the remainder of the list. For a move to complete successfully, the target
directory must exist and be accessible to the OTS system. If a move fails, the system will simply
retry the operation next time the cleanup process runs.
The final control in the dialog allows the user to control how frequently the cleanup process runs.
It is guaranteed that cleanup passes will occur no more frequently than specified here. It is
possible for the system to defer cleanup for a longer interval as necessary.
2-88
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
ResultsViewer
The OTS Results Viewer is a stand-alone Windows program that reads the Test Results files
from the OTS Test System. It provides the following functionality:
ꢁ Access to test results files, either on the OTS system or on the file system of the computer
that is running ResultsViewer
ꢁ Display of results data – Cumulative Results, Analysis, and History – with the same
presentation as the OTS User Interface, TekUI
ꢁ Printing of Cumulative Results and Analysis data, and export of the same text to an ASCII
text file or the Windows clipboard
ꢁ Export of Cumulative Results, Analysis, and History data in delimited ASCII-text form, to a
file or to the Windows clipboard
ꢁ Printing of History data to a graphical form
ꢁ Copying results files to a directory on the local file system
NOTE: The results of a test are stored in two files, with the same file name but different
extensions. One has extension .sum (summary information) and one has the extension .his
(history data). Although ResultsViewer file selection operations involve only the .sum file, both
files are used and must be present and in the same directory. Therefore,
ꢀ If you copy a test's results files to another computer or directory, you must copy both the
".sum" and the ".his" files
ꢀ If you rename a test's results files, you must rename both the ".sum" and ".his" file to have the
same name
ꢀ If you use the File menu Save As function to copy the currently active test results to a
directory on the local computer, the operation creates both the “.sum” and the “.his” files under
the specified name
Operation
To start ResultsViewer, double-click on its icon. It can also be started from TekUI, by clicking
on the View menu and selecting Test Results.
Opening files on the local computer
On the Local computer:
To open a file locally, click on File and select Open Local File. A dialog box displays from
which the user may select one or more test results files. Files with an extension of .sum are test
results files.
On the OTS System:
To open a file on the OTS system, the ResultsViewer must be connected to an operating OTS
system. Once the ResultsViewer is connected, click on File and select Open File on Server. A
dialog box appears with a listing of all available files, their creation times, and any Test
Description text with which the user annotated the test.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Connecting to an OTS System
ResultsViewer uses the same mechanism as the OTS User Interface program, TekUI. The OTS
user manual discusses this procedure in more detail. In quick overview, click on File and Select
Server in ResultsViewer. A dialog box displays from which the user can connect to an OTS
system or disconnect an existing connection.
NOTE: When ResultsViewer is started from TekUI, it starts, by default, connected to the same
OTS system as TekUI.
Viewing results files
When a test results file is opened, a measurement screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-65.
The screen has three tabs for Cumulative Results, Analysis Results, and History Data. The
window title bar displays the file name, the start time for the test displayed, and the device whose
data is displayed.
These screens provide the same information and controls as the Measurement Results screens in
the TekUI. Refer to Measurement Results section of the module user manual for detailed
information of the data presented.
Figure 2-65: Cumulative Results screen of the ResultsViewer
2-90
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Selecting and arranging windows
The Window menu in the ResultsViewer contains the usual commands to close, cascade, tile, and
otherwise arrange windows. It also contains a list of windows for all open files, and this list
provides direct access to any window.
Printing results data
All Print controls are located under the File menu. The Print Setup option allows selecting a
printer, even when no files are open.
Print Results prints a report displaying all the parameters of the Cumulative Data and Analysis
pages.
Print History Graphics prints a page showing the same information as is displayed on the active
window’s history tab.
Configuring ResultsViewer
To configure the ResultsViewer, click View and select Options. An Options dialog box will
appear in which the user may change the following options:
ꢁ SONET or SDH conventions for parameter names
ꢁ Option to have ResultsViewer automatically connect to an OTS system on start-up
ꢁ Option to have ResultsViewer display the Tektronix splash screen on start-up
Exporting test data to other programs
ResultsViewer can export results data as either ASCII text, primarily intended for
documentation, or delimited, formatted ASCII text readable by spreadsheet programs.
Exporting text
To export the test results file as text, click on Export and select Summary (text) to File. This
option writes an ASCII file containing exactly the same information as the printed output of the
Print Results command. Summary (text) to Clipboard writes the same ASCII text to the
Windows clipboard. Summary Text Preview displays the same text in a pop-up window.
Exporting numeric data
Under the Export menu, the Data to File selection writes a file of delimited ASCII data
containing information selected by the user; Data to Clipboard writes the same information to the
Windows clipboard. Data Preview displays the same text in a pop-up window. The following
paragraphs describe the data available, the formats, and the process of configuring a file to
contain the desired information.
The data
Table 2-2 shows a sample output, which reflects all possible fields of data.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Table 2-2: Sample output of data from a test results file
T1
"Test File Info"
"File"
S01
S02
S03
S04
S05
T1
"data_1022_00_004.sum"
9/13/00 5:00:2 PM
9/13/00 5:00:6 PM
0d 00:00:04
"Start Time"
"End Time"
"Test Time"
"Description"
""
"Cumulative Measurements"
T2
"Param"
"LOS"
"LOF"
"OOF"
"TIM"
"AIS"
"ES"
C01
C02
C03
C04
C05
C06
T2
0
0
0
0
0
"RDI"
0
"Param"
"B1"
"ES"
"COUNT"
"RATIO"
0.00
C07
C08
C09
C10
T2
0
0
0
0
0
"FAS"
"B2"
0
0.00
0
0.00
"REI"
0
0.00
"Param"
"TIM-P"
"AIS-P"
"RDI-P"
"LSS"
"ES"
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
T2
0
0
0
0
"PLM"
"Param"
"B3"
0
"ES"
"COUNT"
"RATIO"
0.00
C18
C19
C20
T1
0
0
0
0
0
0
"REI-P"
"TSE"
0.00
0.00
"Sonet GR-253 Analysis(Section)"
T2
"Param"
"EB"
"Count"
"Ratio"
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
A101
A102
A103
A104
A105
A106
T2
0
"BBE"
"ES"
0
0
"SES"
"ESA"
"ESB"
"Param"
"CSES"
"Param"
"UAS"
0
0
0
"Count"
A107
T2
0
"Count"
0
"Ratio"
0.00
A108
T1
"Sonet GR-253 Analysis(Line Near end/Far end)"
T2
"Param"
"EB"
"Count"
0
"Ratio"
0.00
"Count"
0
"Ratio"
0.00
A201
2-92
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
A202
A203
A204
A205
A206
T2
"BBE"
"ES"
0
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
"Count"
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0
"SES"
0
"ESA"
"ESB"
"Param"
"CSES"
"Param"
"UAS"
0
0
"Count"
A207
T2
0
"Count"
0
"Ratio"
0.00
"Count"
0
"Ratio"
0.00
A208
T1
"Sonet GR-253 Analysis(Path Near end/Far end)"
T2
"Param"
"EB"
"Count"
"Ratio"
0.00
"Count"
"Ratio"
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
A501
A502
A503
A504
A505
A506
T2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
"BBE"
"ES"
0
0.00
0
0.00
"SES"
"ESA"
"ESB"
"Param"
"CSES"
"Param"
"UAS"
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
"Count"
"Count"
0
A507
T2
0
"Count"
0
"Ratio"
0.00
"Count"
0
"Ratio"
0.00
A508
T1
"SDH G.826 Analysis (Regenerator Section)"
T2
"Param"
"EB"
"Count"
"Ratio"
0.00
A301
A302
A303
A304
T2
0
"BBE"
"ES"
0
0.00
4
1.00
"SES"
4
1.00
"Param"
"CSES"
"Param"
"UAS"
"Count"
A305
T2
1
"Count"
0
"Ratio"
0.00
A306
T1
"SDH G.826 Analysis (Multiplex Section Near end/Far end)"
T2
"Param"
"EB"
"Count"
"Ratio"
0.00
"Count"
"Ratio"
0.00
A401
A402
A403
A404
T2
0
0
0
0
0
"BBE"
"ES"
0
0.00
0.00
0
0.00
0.00
"SES"
0
0.00
0.00
"Param"
"CSES"
"Param"
"UAS"
"Count"
"Count"
0
A405
T2
0
"Count"
0
"Ratio"
0.00
"Count"
0
"Ratio"
0.00
A406
T1
"SDH G.826 Analysis (Path Near end/Far end)"
T2
"Param"
"EB"
"Count"
"Ratio"
0.00
"Count"
"Ratio"
0.00
A601
A602
A603
0
0
0
0
0
0
"BBE"
"ES"
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
OTS9100 User Manual
2-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
A604
T2
"SES"
0
0.00
0
0.00
"Param"
"CSES"
"Param"
"UAS"
"Count"
"Count"
0
A605
T2
0
"Count"
0
"Ratio"
0.00
"Count"
0
"Ratio"
0.00
A606
T1
"History Data"
"Resolution"
1
T2
"SampleCount"
4
H1
"Time"
"Day"
"Clock"
"LOS"
"LOF"
"OOF"
"TIM"
"AIS"
"RDI"
"B1"
"B2"
"FAS"
"REI"
"TIM-
P"
T2
H2
H2
H2
H2
H3
H2
0
0
17:00:02
17:00:03
17:00:04
17:00:05
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
2
0
3
"Pause"
4
0
00:00:07
0
17:00:13
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2-94
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Record type codes
Each record appears as one line of text. If the report options include Record Type Codes, the
first entry in each record is a code indicating the type of that record.
Record types are:
ꢁ General
T1
T2
Text – Section heading
Text – Column headings
ꢁ Summary report (Test file) info
S01
S02
S03
S04
S05
File name
Test start time
Test end time
Test elapsed time, not including pauses
Test description text
ꢁ Cumulative results
C01
C02
C03
C04
C05
C06
C07
C08
C09
C10
LOS
LOF
OOF
TIM-S (RS-TIM)
AIS-L (MS-AIS)
RDI-L (MS-RDI)
B1
FAS
B2
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES, Count, Ratio
ES, Count, Ratio
ES, Count, Ratio
ES, Count, Ratio
REI-L (MS-REI)
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C18
C19
C20
TIM-P (HP-TIM)
AIS-P (HP-AIS)
RDI-P (HP-RDI)
LSS
PLM (HPPLM)
B3
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES, Count, Ratio
ES, Count, Ratio
ES, Count, Ratio
REI-P (HP-REI)
TSE
NOTE: C11 through C20 are applicable only for OTS91T2 and OTS91R2 module cards.
ꢁ Sonet GR-253 (Section) Analysis
A101
A102
A103
A104
A105
A106
A107
A108
EB
BBE
ES
SES
ESA
ESB
CSES
UAS
Count, Ratio
Count, Ratio
Count, Ratio
Count, Ratio
Count, Ratio
Count, Ratio
Count (only)
Count, Ratio
OTS9100 User Manual
2-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
ꢁ Sonet GR-253 (Line) Analysis
A201
A202
A203
A204
A205
A206
A207
A208
EB
BBE
ES
SES
ESA
ESB
CSES
UAS
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count (Near End); Count (Far End) (only)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
ꢁ Sonet GR-253 (Path) Analysis
A501
A502
A503
A504
A505
A506
A507
A508
EB
BBE
ES
SES
ESA
ESB
CSES
UAS
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count (Near End); Count (Far End) (only)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
NOTE: A501 through A508 are applicable only for OTS91R2 module cards.
ꢁ SDH G.826 (Regenerator Section) Analysis
A301
A302
A303
A304
A305
A306
EB
BBE
ES
SES
CSES
UAS
Count, Ratio
Count, Ratio
Count, Ratio
Count, Ratio
Count (only)
Count, Ratio
ꢁ SDH G.826 (Multiplex Section) Analysis
A401
A402
A403
A404
A405
A406
EB
BBE
ES
SES
CSES
UAS
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count (Near End); Count (Far End) (only)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
ꢁ SDH G.826 (Path) Analysis
A601
A602
A603
A604
A605
A606
EB
BBE
ES
SES
CSES
UAS
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
Count (Near End); Count (Far End) (only)
Count, Ratio (Near End); Count, Ratio (Far End)
NOTE: A601 through A606 are applicable only for OTS91T2 and OTS91R2 module cards.
2-96
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
History data
H1 Time resolution (seconds/sample), Number of samples in report period
H2 History data: selected fields from
ꢀ Sample time (seconds since start of test)
ꢀ Calendar day relative to the day on which the test started
ꢀ Time-of-day
ꢀ LOS
ꢀ LOF
ꢀ OOF
ꢀ TIM-S (RS-TIM)
ꢀ AIS-L (MS-AIS)
ꢀ RDI-L (MS-RDI)
ꢀ B1
ꢀ B2
ꢀ FAS
ꢀ REI-L (MS-REI)
ꢀ TIM-P (HP-TIM)
ꢀ AIS-P (HP-AIS)
ꢀ RDI-P (HP-RDI)
ꢀ B3
ꢀ REI-P (HP-REI)
ꢀ TSE
ꢀ LSS
ꢀ PLM (HP-PLM)
NOTE: TIM-P (HP-TIM) through PLM (HP-PLM) are applicable only for OTS91R2 module cards.
H3 Test Pause/Power-Out indicator, Time in hr:min:sec of pause
NOTE: The number of samples in the H1 record includes samples with all counts zero, even if the
report is set to exclude these.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Configuring the exported data
To configure the exported data, click on Export and select Data Setup. The Configure Data
Report dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-66, is now displayed. To enable a selection, click the
box or radio button beside it. The report written to the file or clipboard is configured
accordingly.
Figure 2-66: Configure Data Report dialog box
2-98
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
OTS System Event Printer Application
This is an auxiliary application that runs on the OTS system to log receiver events (defects and
anomalies). Events may be printed as they are logged, if a printer is attached to the system, or
the list of logged events may be captured to a file or to the Windows clipboard.
Starting the Event Printer program
The Event Printer is a separate application from the user interface. To start Event Printer,
double-click its desktop icon. When started, the Event Printer main screen is displayed, as
shown in Figure 2-67.
Figure 2-67: Event Printer main screen
Logging
Logging controls how events are logged. The selections available are:
o
o
o
Off. Event logging is disabled
Display. Events are logged to the application’s text window only
Display/Print. Events are logged to the application’s window and to the default
Windows printer
Select Events
Clicking this button brings up a window, shown and discussed below, with which the user selects
the events to be monitored.
OTS9100 User Manual
2-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Copy to Clipboard
Clicking this button copies the list of logged events to the Windows Clipboard, from which it
may be pasted into another application such as a word processor.
Copy to File
Clicking this button brings up a file selection dialog, with which the user specifies the location
and name of a text file to receive the list of logged events.
Copy to Printer
Clicking this button copies the list of logged events to the default Windows printer. Note that
this button is disabled if the currently selected logging mode is Display/Print.
Clear
Clicking this button clears the list of logged events. Any events that haven’t already been copied
or printed are thus lost.
Selecting events to log
Clicking the Select Events button brings up the Select Events to Monitor display, as shown in
Figure 2-68, which has one panel for each OTS receiver module.
Figure 2-68: Select Events to Monitor dialog box
2-100
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
Checking a check box on a receiver’s panel enables logging for the corresponding event on that
receiver.
The events selected are saved in persistent storage on the OTS system and are restored when the
Event Printer application is next started.
Muting: Event Printer behavior with continuous events
When Event Printer logs events in five consecutive seconds, it follows the last event with the
words MUTE ON and suppresses further logging. When a one-second interval occurs in which no
loggable events occur, Event Printer logs the event as MUTE OFF and resumes normal event
logging.
Minimizing the Event Printer window
The Event Printer application may be minimized, so that its window is not displayed but its
button is visible in the Windows Taskbar. It continues to log events while minimized.
Exiting the Event Printer application stops the logging of events.
Configuring a printer in Windows
Printing events as they occur is only possible with a printer capable of printing a single line at a
time, e.g., a dot-matrix printer. Printers such as laser printers, which print an entire page at a
time, cannot do this.
To use a suitably capable printer for line-at-a-time operation, configure it as follows:
1. In the Windows Start Menu, select Settings->Printers
2. Right-click the printer selected as the default Windows printer, and select Properties.
3. Select the Scheduling tab
4. Select “Print directly to the printer” and click OK
OTS9100 User Manual
2-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics: User Interface
2-102
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
This chapter describes the remote commands that may be used to control the OTS9100 system and the
OTS9100 module from an external controller. The remote commands conform to IEEE 488.2 and SCPI
conventions. The OTS9100 system accepts remote commands over GPIB, RS-232 serial links, or a
network using Telnet protocol.
The Commands Overview section organizes the remote commands by function in a simple command
tree format.
The Syntax section provides an overview of IEEE 488.2 command formats, the SCPI conventions, and
the data formats used by the OTS9100 system. Readers familiar with these topics may find that it
duplicates material they already know.
The Command Descriptions section provides detailed descriptions of the format and parameters of each
OTS9100 system remote commands. These commands are listed in alphabetical order and listed by page
number in the Table of Contents.
Commands Overview
This section organizes the OTS9100 remote commands by function in a simple command tree format.
Each main topic provides a brief description of the command set uses and then lists each command in that
section. For more detail on specific commands, refer to the following section, Command Descriptions,
which lists all commands in alphabetical order.
IEEE 488.2 System Commands
These commands control basic generic functionality and interface control functions.
Clear interface error status
Enable error status conditions
Query error status
Query identification string
Query all instrument settings
Query operation complete
Recall system settings
*CLS
*ESE
*ESR?
*IDN?
*LRN?
*OPC?
*RCL
*RST
Restore default settings
Restore saved settings
*SAV
Remote Control Setup and Format Commands
These commands provide commands to initialize the error reporting system, get the error status from the
previous commands, query response command headers and keywords in short or long form, and set
binary block data format.
Initialize error reporting system
:status:preset
Get error status from previous commands
Query response command headers
Query response keywords – short/long form
Binary or hex block data format
:system:error
:system:headers
:system:verbose
:system:format:block
OTS9100 User Manual
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Commands Overview
Remote Control Port Settings
These commands provide the GPIB, Serial, and network port setups as well as the serial and network port
protocols.
GPIB port setup
:system:communicate:gpib:primary
:system:communicate:gpib:secondary
COM1 serial port setup
enable
:system:communicate:serial:com1a:enable
:system:communicate:serial:com1a:rate
:system:communicate:serial:com1a:ndata
:system:communicate:serial:com1a:nstop
:system:communicate:serial:com1a:flow
:system:communicate:serial:com1a:parity
:system:communicate:serial:com1a:dtr
:system:communicate:serial:com1a:rts
:system:communicate:serial:com2a: ... as above
:system:communicate:network:ipport
baud rate
number of data bits
number of stop bits
flow control mode
parity
RS-232 DTR line
RS-232 RTS line
COM2 serial port setup
Network port connect address
COM1 serial port protocol
echo control
:system:communicate:serial:com1a:echo
:system:communicate:serial:com1a:prompt
:system:communicate:serial:com1a:rxterm
:system:communicate:serial:com1a:txterm
:system:communicate:serial:com2a: ... as above
:system:communicate:network: ... as above
:system:communicate:port: ... as above
prompt
input terminator
output terminator
COM2 serial port protocol
Network session protocol, initial values
Current serial or network port session protocol
Remote Control Lockout
These commands enable remote control lockout.
:system:lock:request
:system:lock:release
System Configuration Queries
These commands provide the ability to query the modules installed in the OTS9100 system to determine
what configurations are installed.
:system:config:module:slots
:system:config:module:type
:system:config:module:version
:system:config:module:variant
:system:config:module:serial
3-2
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Commands Overview
Save and Restore System Settings
These commands provide the save and restore functionality for system level settings.
*SAV
*RCL
:system:description:setup
System File Management
These commands define the necessary settings to allow the system to delete old files thus preventing
performance degradation due to lack of memory.
:system:files:mgmt:results
System Signal Standard (OTS9100 module)
This command sets all system modules to the SONET or SDH signal standard.
:system:signal:standard
Receiver Commands (OTS9100 module)
These commands provide configuration and control of the receiver settings.
Signal standard
Receiver input threshold
Line rate
:sense:signal:standard
:sense:input:threshold
:sense:data:rate
Signal structure
Active payload channel
Payload data
:sense:data:structure
:sense:data:channel
:sense:data:payload:pattern
Generate trigger on anomaly or defect received :sense:trigger:mode
Received signal status
:sense:status:leds
J0 section trace received
J0 section trace comparison value
J1 path trace received
:sense:data:section:trace
:sense:analysis:section:trace
:sense:data:path:trace
:sense:analysis:path:trace
:sense:data:poh:hpplm
:sense:data:poh:c2a:byte
:sense:overhead:monitor:channel
:sense:data:toh
J1 path trace comparison value
Path label mismatch
Overhead monitor channel selection
Transport overhead data received
Receiver Optics
:sense:optical
OTS9100 User Manual
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Commands Overview
Receiver Signal Measurement Commands (OTS9100 module)
These commands provide control of the signal measurement functions.
Line parameters
Section parameters
Path parameters
:sense:measure:line:cumulative
:sense:measure:line:window
:sense:measure:section:cumulative
:sense:measure:section:window
:sense:measure:path:cumulative
:sense:measure:path:window
:sense:measure:window
Windowed measurement setup
APS measurements
:sense:measure:apstime
Receiver Signal Analysis Commands (OTS9100 module)
These commands provide control of the signal analysis functions.
GR-253 analysis – Line parameters
GR-253 analysis – Path parameters
GR-253 analysis – Section parameters
G.826 analysis – MS parameters
G.826 analysis – Path parameters
G.826 analysis – RS parameters
:sense:analysis:gr253a:line
:sense:analysis:gr253a:path
:sense:analysis:gr253a:section
:sense:analysis:g826a:ms
:sense:analysis:g826a:path
:sense:analysis:g826a:rs
Receiver Test Control (OTS9100 module)
These commands provide control of test setup parameters.
Test execution: continuous, timed, repetitive
Timed test duration
:sense:test:mode
:sense:test:time
Test annotation text
:sense:test:description
:sense:test:state
Test start/stop and run-state query
Test elapsed time query
:sense:test:time:elapsed
3-4
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Commands Overview
Transmitter Commands (OTS9100 module)
These commands provide configuration and control of the transmitter settings.
Signal standard
:source:signal:standard
:source:output:laser
Laser off/on
Laser information
:source:output:laser:info
:source:data:rate
Line rate
Data source (internal or through)
Clock source
:source:data:source
:source:clock:source
Signal structure
:source:data:structure
:source:data:channel
Active payload channel
Payload data
:source:data:payload:pattern
:source:data:payload:background:pattern
:source:data:background:structure
:source:insert:anomaly
:source:insert:defect
Background pattern
Background structure
Anomaly insertion
Defect insertion
Generate trigger on anomaly or defect
J0 section trace
:source:trigger:mode
:source:data:section:trace
:source:data:path:trace
:source:data:toh
J1 Path trace
Transport overhead data
Path overhead data
Path overhead C2 byte
Through mode overhead insertion
Through mode parity calculation
Optical output laser
:source:data:poh
:source:data:poh:c2a
:source:data:overhead:passthrough
:source:data:parity:loop
:sense:optical
OTS9100 User Manual
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Syntax
Syntax
This section contains information on the Standard commands for Programmable Instruments (SCPI) and
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands that may be used to program the OTS9100 10Gb/s SDH/SONET
module.
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
Description
ANSI/IEEE Standard 488.2 defines the codes, formats, protocols, and usage of common commands and
queries used on the GPIB interface between the controller and the instruments. The OTS9100 complies
with this standard.
Command and Query Structure
The syntax of an IEEE 488.2 common command is an asterisk (*) followed by a command and,
optionally, a space and parameter value. The syntax for an IEEE 488.2 common query is an asterisk (*)
followed by a query and a question mark. The following are examples of common commands:
ꢀ *ESE 16
ꢀ *CLS
The following are examples of common queries:
ꢀ *ESR?
ꢀ *IDN?
OTS9100 User Manual
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Syntax
Block Format
IEEE-488 block format is a means of encoding arbitrary binary data, including characters that aren’t valid
in text strings, for transmission over a GPIB link. The format is most easily explained with an example.
This is a block containing 16 bytes of data:
#216abcdeFGHIJklmnop
where:
‘#’ denotes the start of a block
‘2’ is the number of digits that follow, to represent the byte count in the block
‘16’ is the number (represented by two decimal digits) of data bytes
‘abcdeFGHIJklmnop’ is the 16 data bytes in this example
The OTS9100 uses blocks in commands and queries for overhead data and section trace sequences; the
descriptions of these commands include the number of bytes expected or sent.
Hex Block Format
The GPIB can transmit eight-bit binary data without problems. But the OTS9100 can also be controlled
over RS-232 serial links and Telnet protocol over network links. These may not be able to send eight-bit
data or ASCII control characters. For this reason, the OTS9100 remote command system implements an
alternative block format called hex block format in which each byte of binary data is sent as two hex
digits using the characters 0 to 9 and A to F.
Blocks in hex format thus consist of twice many characters as the corresponding blocks in binary format.
The block in the example above would be, in hex format,
#2326162636465464748494A6B6C6D6E6F70
where
‘#232’ is the prefix for a 32-character block
‘61’ is the hexadecimal representation of “a,” the first character in the block
‘62’ is the hexadecimal representation of “b,” and so on.
Note that the block’s count of data bytes is doubled, representing twice as much data as in the binary-
format block.
The OTS9100 system must be explicitly set to transmit or receive blocks in binary or hex block format.
See the description of the command.
OTS9100 User Manual
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Syntax
SCPI Commands and Queries
SCPI is a standard that provides guidelines for remote programming of instruments. These guidelines
provide a consistent programming environment for instrument control and data usage. This environment
uses defined programming messages, instrument responses, and data format across all SCPI instruments,
regardless of manufacturer. The OTS9100 modules uses a command language derived from this SCPI
standard.
The SCPI language is based on a hierarchical tree structure, as shown in Figure 3-1, that represents a
subsystem. The top level of the tree is the root node; it is followed by one or more lower-level nodes.
SENSe
Root node
MEASure
Lower-level
nodes
LINE
SECTion
WINDow
Figure 3-1: Example of SCPI subsystem hierarchy tree
You can create commands and queries from these subsystem hierarchy trees.
Command Format
A command sets the value of an instrument parameter or initiates an instrument event. A command
consists of one or more alphanumeric keywords separated by colons; this part is called the header. If the
command includes parameter values, these appear after the header and separated from the header by a
space. Multiple parameter values are separated by commas.
Example
The command to set the OTS-9100 Receiver input threshold voltage to 100 mV is
:SENSE:INPUT:THRESHOLD 100
where :SENSE:INPUT:THRESHOLD is the header, and 100 is the parameter value.
Query format
A query fetches the current value of an instrument parameter, measurement, or status condition. A query
consists of a header, like that of a command, followed by a question mark. If a query includes parameter
values, these appear after the question mark and a separating space.
Example
The query to fetch from the OTS-9100 Receiver the current setting of the input threshold voltage is
:SENSE:INPUT:THRESHOLD?
The response to this query might be the value, 100 - it might also be formatted as a complete command,
for example:
:SENSE:INPUT:THRESHOLD 100
as controlled by the :SYSTEM:HEADERS and :SYSTEM:VERBOSE commands (q.v.).
3-8
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Syntax
Parameter types and formats
Parameter values may be of several different types, e.g., integer numbers, floating-point numbers,
selections from a list of particular values, strings, etc. The following are the parameter types that appear
in OTS9100 remote control commands.
<NR1>
<NR2>
<NR3>
An integer number.
A decimal number with integer and/or fractional parts, e.g., 12.43
A decimal number in scientific notation, e.g., 1.243E1
NOTE: A command parameter value specified as <NR2> or <NR3> may be entered in either
standard or scientific-notation formats. A query will return its value in the format indicated.
<Enum>
A selection from an enumerated list of values that appear as alphanumeric keywords,
usually with a mnemonic value.
For example, the command that specifies the payload inserted into the generated signal
appears as:
:SOURCE:DATA:PAYLOAD:PATTERN <Enum>
followed by a list of possible values,
PRBS23A
PRBS23I
ZEROS
ONES
Standard PRBS 223-1 pattern
Inverted PRBS 223-1 pattern
Constant zero data
Constant one data
The command must include one of these values; the corresponding query returns one of
these values corresponding to the instrument’s current setting.
<Boolean>
A binary value that typically indicates whether a function is on or off, enabled, or
disabled. Querying a Boolean parameter always returns 0 or 1, never OFF or ON.
Boolean values may be specified as follows:
0 or OFF
1 or ON
off, disabled
on, enabled
<String>
A string of characters, delimited by either apostrophes ‘ or quote marks “. Strings must,
in general, be composed of ASCII printing characters and may not contain the apostrophe
or quote mark used as the delimiter.
OTS9100 User Manual
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Syntax
<Block>
An array of arbitrary binary data (bytes), including characters not in the ASCII printing
character set. A block is transmitted as a block header followed by data bytes, as in the
following example:
#216ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
in which:
⇒ The # character indicates that what follows is a block of data
⇒ The first digit, 2 in this example, is the number of digits in the block length field
⇒ The next digits, of which there are two in this example, indicate the number of
bytes of data that follow. In this example, there are 16 bytes, so the block length
field is 16. There are two digits in "16," so the character "2" following the "#" is
the digit count.
⇒ The bytes that follow, ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP, are the actual data. The number
of bytes of data must match the number indicated by the block header.
Optional and alternative parameters
Some parameters are optional; these appear in brackets ([ ]):
:SENSE:STATUS:LEDS [<NR1>]
The command description includes the meaning of the parameter and the effect of leaving it out. Some
parameters may accept data of more than one type; the alternatives are shown separated by a vertical bar.
For example,
:SYSTEM:COMMUNICATE:GPIB:PRIMARY <Enum>|<NR1>
means that the command can accept either a keyword from the given enum list or an integer numeric
value.
3-10
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Syntax
Abbreviating Commands, Queries, and Parameters
You can abbreviate most SCPI commands, queries, and parameters to an accepted short form. This
manual shows these short forms as a combination of upper and lower case letters. The upper case letters
tell you what the accepted short form should consist of, as shown in Figure 3-2, you can create a short
form by using only the upper case letters. The accepted short form and long form are equivalent and
request the same action of the instrument.
Long form of a
command
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:PROMpt
Minimum information needed
for accepted short form
Accepted short form
of a command and parameter
SYST:COMM:SERI:COM1A:PROM
Figure 3-2: Example of abbreviating a command
NOTE: The numeric part of a command or query must always be included in the accepted short
form. In Figure 3-2, the “1” of “COM1A” is always included in the command or query.
Controlling Responses to Queries
You can control the form of responses returned by queries by changing the parameter values of
SYSTem:HEADers and SYSTem:VERBose. These two commands control whether the query nodes are
returned with the response, and, if the query nodes are returned, whether they are in the long or short
form. SYSTem:HEADers controls the presence of the query nodes, and SYSTem:VERBose controls the
length of these nodes. The table below shows the possible combinations of these commands and an
example of a query response.
SYSTem:HEADers set to: SYSTem:VERBose set to: Example of a response
1 or ON
1 or ON
0 or OFF
0 or OFF
1 or ON
0 or OFF
0 or OFF
1 or ON
OUTPUT1:TELECOM:TYPE OPTICAL
OUTPUT1:TEL:TYPE OPT
OPT
OPTICAL
OTS9100 User Manual
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Syntax
Chaining Commands and Queries
You can chain several commands or queries together into a single message. To create a chained message,
first create a command or query, add a semicolon (;), and then add more commands or queries and
semicolons until you are done. Figure 3-3 illustrates a chained message consisting of several commands
and queries. The single chained message should end in a command or query, not a semicolon. Responses
to any queries in your message are separated by semicolons.
SOURCE:DATA:RATE?;SOURCE:DATA:PAYLOAD:PATTERN?
First query
Second query
The response from this chained
message might be
STS-192c; PRBS23A
Response from first query
Response from second query
Figure 3-3: Example of chaining commands and queries
If a command or query has the same root and lower-level nodes as the previous command or query, you
can omit these nodes. In Figure 3-4, the second command has the same root and lower-level nodes
(SOURCe:INSErt:ANOMaly) as the first command, so these nodes can be omitted.
SOURce:INSErt:ANOMaly:TYPE:REI;SOURce:INSErt:ANOMaly:RATE 1e-4
Identical root and lower-level nodes
SOURce:INSErt:ANOMaly:TYPE:REI;RATE 1e-4
Second command (omitted the
root and lower-level nodes)
First command
Figure 3-4: Example of omitting root and lower-level nodes in chained message
3-12
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Syntax
General Rules
Here are some general rules for using SCPI commands, queries, and parameters:
ꢀ You can use single (‘ ’) or double (“ ”) quotation marks for quoted strings, but you cannot use
both types of quotation marks for the same string.
correct:
correct:
“This string uses quotation marks correctly.”
‘This string also uses quotation marks correctly.’
incorrect: “This string does not use quotation marks correctly.’
ꢀ You can use upper case, lower case, or a mixture of both cases for all command, queries, and
parameters.
SOURCE:DATA:STRUCTURE
is the same as
source:data:structure
and
SOURCE:data:Structure
ꢀ No embedded spaces are allowed between or within nodes.
correct:
SOURce:DATA:STRUcture
incorrect: SOURce: DATA: STRUcture
incorrect: SO URce:DATA: STRU cture
Slot Specifiers
The OTS9100 system can contain multiple modules of the same type, e.g., more than one receiver, more
than one transmitter. Any module-specific command or query may include, as a numeric suffix on the
header’s first keyword, the slot number of the target module to indicate the particular instance of that
module for which the command or query is intended.
For example, the command
:SOURCE5:INSERT:ANOMALY:MODE CONTINUOUS
is intended for the transmitter module in slot 5.
Slot specifiers are indicated by <Slot> in the command listings. Slot specifiers are optional; if a slot
specifier is omitted, the command or query is directed to the lowest-numbered slot that contains a module
for which the command or query is valid.
OTS9100 User Manual
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
Command Description
This section provides detailed descriptions of the format and parameters of each OTS9100 command. These
commands are listed in alphabetical order.
NOTE: Not all commands and command parameters are available for all modules. Commands with
option limitations are so noted.
*CLS
This command clears the IEEE-488.2 error status register and event queue.
Syntax *CLS
*ESE
This command sets the value of the IEEE-488.2 Event Status Enable register. The query form returns the
current value.
Syntax *ESE?
*ESE <NR1>
*ESR
This query returns the value of the IEEE-488.2 Event Status Register.
Syntax *ESR?
*IDN
This query returns the identification string for the Tektronix OTS9100 instrument.
Syntax *IDN?
*LRN
This query returns the current state of the instrument as a string of commands that will restore the
instrument to that state.
Syntax *LRN?
OTS9100 User Manual
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
*OPC
*RCL
This query returns '1' to indicate that any pending operation is complete.
Syntax *OPC?
This command recalls system parameter settings from the specified buffer. The buffer specification is a
number in the range 1 to 99.
Syntax *RCL <NR1>
*RST
*SAV
This command restores all system parameters to their default values.
Syntax *RST
This command saves system parameter settings to the specified buffer. The buffer specification is a
number in the range 1 to 99.
Syntax *SAV <NR1>
OTS9100 User Manual
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:MS:FAR
This query returns the value of the specified Far-End Multiplexor Section parameter from G.826 analysis
of received data.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:G826A:MS:FAR? <Enum>
Parameter
ETIME
EB_C
Description
Elapsed time
Errored blocks
EB_R
Errored block ratio
BBE_C
BBE_R
EFS_C
EFS_R
ES_C
Background block errors
Background block error ratio
Error-free seconds
Error-free seconds ratio
Errored seconds
ES_R
Errored second ratio
Severely errored seconds
Severely errored second ratio
Consecutive SES periods
Unavailable seconds
Unavailable seconds error ratio
SES_C
SES_R
CSES_C
UAS_C
UAS_R
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:MS:FAR:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the Far-End Multiplexor Section parameters from G.826 analysis of
received data. The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:MS:FAR.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:G826A:MS:FAR:ALL?
3-16
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:MS:NEAR
This query returns the value of the specified Near-End Multiplexer Section parameter from G.826 analysis
of received data.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:G826A:MS:NEAR? <Enum>
Parameters
ETIME
EB_C
Description
Elapsed time
Errored blocks
EB_R
Errored block ratio
BBE_C
BBE_R
EFS_C
EFS_R
ES_C
Background block errors
Background block error ratio
Error-free seconds
Error-free seconds ratio
Errored seconds
ES_R
Errored second ratio
Severely errored seconds
Severely errored second ratio
Consecutive SES periods
Unavailable seconds
Unavailable seconds error ratio
SES_C
SES_R
CSES_C
UAS_C
UAS_R
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:MS:NEAR:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the Near-End Multiplexer Section parameters from G.826 analysis
of received data. The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:MS:NEAR.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:G826A:MS:NEAR:ALL?
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:PATH:FAR
This query returns the value of the specified Far-End Path parameter from G.826 analysis of received
data. Ratios are returned as NR3 values, other parameters as NR1 values.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:G826A:PATH:FAR? <Enum>
Parameters
ETIME
EB_C
Description
Elapsed time
Errored blocks
EB_R
Errored block ratio
BBE_C
BBE_R
EFS_C
EFS_R
ES_C
Background block errors
Background block error ratio
Error-free seconds
Error-free seconds ratio
Errored seconds
ES_R
Errored second ratio
Severely errored seconds
Severely errored second ratio
Consecutive SES periods
Unavailable seconds
Unavailable seconds error ratio
SES_C
SES_R
CSES_C
UAS_C
UAS_R
OTS9100 User Manual
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:PATH:FAR:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the Far-End Path parameters from G.826 analysis of received data.
The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under the heading
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:PATH:FAR. Ratios are returned as NR3 values, other parameters as NR1
values.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:G826A:PATH:FAR:ALL?
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:PATH:NEAR
This query returns the value of the specified Near-End Path parameter from G.826 analysis of received
data. Ratios are returned as NR3 values, other parameters as NR1 values.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:G826A:PATH:NEAR? <Enum>
Parameters
ETIME
EB_C
Description
Elapsed time
Errored blocks
EB_R
Errored block ratio
BBE_C
BBE_R
EFS_C
EFS_R
ES_C
Background block errors
Background block error ratio
Error-free seconds
Error-free seconds ratio
Errored seconds
ES_R
Errored second ratio
Severely errored seconds
Severely errored second ratio
Consecutive SES periods
Unavailable seconds
Unavailable seconds error ratio
SES_C
SES_R
CSES_C
UAS_C
UAS_R
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:PATH:NEAR:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the Near-End Path parameters from G.826 analysis of received
data. The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under the heading
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:PATH:NEAR. Ratios are returned as NR3 values, other parameters as NR1
values.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:G826A:PATH:NEAR:ALL?
3-18
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:RS
This query returns the value of the specified Regenerator Section parameter from G.826 analysis of
received data.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:G826A:RS? <Enum>
Parameter
ETIME
EB_C
Description
Elapsed time
Errored blocks
EB_R
Errored block ratio
BBE_C
BBE_R
ES_C
Background block errors
Background block error ratio
Errored seconds
ES_R
Errored second ratio
Severely errored seconds
Severely errored second ratio
Consecutive SES periods
Unavailable seconds
Unavailable seconds error ratio
SES_C
SES_R
CSES_C
UAS_C
UAS_R
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:RS:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the Regenerator Section parameters from G.826 analysis of
received data. The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under
:SENSe:ANALysis:G826A:RS.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:G826A:RS:ALL?
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:LINE:FAR
This query returns the value of the specified Far-End Line parameter from GR-253 analysis of received
data.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:GR253A:LINE:FAR? <Enum>
Parameters
CV_C
Description
CV Count
CV_R
CV Count Ratio
BBE_C
BBE_R
ES_C
Background block errors
Background block error ratio
Errored seconds
ES_R
Errored second ratio
SES_C
SES_R
ESA_C
ESA_R
ESB_C
ESB_R
CSES_C
UAS_C
UAS_R
Severely errored seconds
Severely errored second ratio
Errored seconds type A
Errored second type A ratio
Errored seconds type B
Errored second type B ratio
Consecutive SES periods
Unavailable seconds
Unavailable seconds error ratio
OTS9100 User Manual
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:LINE:FAR:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the Far-End Line parameters from GR-253 analysis of received
data. The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:LINE:FAR.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:GR253A:LINE:FAR:ALL?
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:LINE:NEAR
This query returns the value of the specified Near-End Line parameter from GR-253 analysis of received
data.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:GR253A:LINE:NEAR? <Enum>
Parameters
CV_C
Description
CV Count
CV_R
CV Count ratio
BBE_C
BBE_R
ES_C
Background block errors
Background block error ratio
Errored seconds
ES_R
Errored second ratio
SES_C
SES_R
ESA_C
ESA_R
ESB_C
ESB_R
CSES_C
UAS_C
UAS_R
Severely errored seconds
Severely errored second ratio
Errored seconds type A
Errored second type A ratio
Errored seconds type B
Errored second type B ratio
Consecutive SES periods
Unavailable seconds
Unavailable seconds error ratio
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:LINE:NEAR:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the Near-End Line parameters from GR-253 analysis of received
data. The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:LINE:NEAR.
Syntax : SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:GR253A:LINE:NEAR:ALL?
3-20
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:PATH:FAR
This query returns the value of the specified Far-End Path parameter from GR-253 analysis of received
data. Ratios are returned as NR3 values, other parameters as NR1 values.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:GR253A:PATH:FAR? <Enum>
Parameters
CV_C
Description
CV Count
CV_R
CV Count ratio
BBE_C
BBE_R
ES_C
Background block errors
Background block error ratio
Errored seconds
ES_R
Errored second ratio
SES_C
SES_R
ESA_C
ESA_R
ESB_C
ESB_R
CSES_C
UAS_C
UAS_R
Severely errored seconds
Severely errored second ratio
Errored seconds type A
Errored second type A ratio
Errored seconds type B
Errored second type B ratio
Consecutive SES periods
Unavailable seconds
Unavailable seconds error ratio
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:PATH:FAR:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the Far-End Path parameters from GR-253 analysis of received
data. The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under the heading
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:PATH:FAR. Ratios are returned as NR3 values, other parameters as NR1
values.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:GR253A:PATH:FAR:ALL?
OTS9100 User Manual
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:PATH:NEAR
This query returns the value of the specified Near-End Path parameter from GR-253 analysis of received
data. Ratios are returned as NR3 values, other parameters as NR1 values.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:GR253A:PATH:NEAR? <Enum>
Parameters
CV_C
Description
CV Count
CV_R
CV Count ratio
BBE_C
BBE_R
ES_C
Background block errors
Background block error ratio
Errored seconds
ES_R
Errored second ratio
SES_C
SES_R
ESA_C
ESA_R
ESB_C
ESB_R
CSES_C
UAS_C
UAS_R
Severely errored seconds
Severely errored second ratio
Errored seconds type A
Errored second type A ratio
Errored seconds type B
Errored second type B ratio
Consecutive SES periods
Unavailable seconds
Unavailable seconds error ratio
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:PATH:NEAR:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the Near-End Path parameters from GR-253 analysis of received
data. Ratios are returned as NR3 values, other parameters as NR1 values. The parameters are returned
in the order in which they are listed under :SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:PATH:NEAR.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:GR253A:PATH:NEAR:ALL?
3-22
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:SECTion
This query returns the value of the specified Section parameter from GR-253 analysis of received data.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:GR253A:SECTion? <Enum>
Parameters
CV_C
Description
CV Count
CV_R
CV Count ratio
BBE_C
BBE_R
ES_C
Background block errors
Background block error ratio
Errored seconds
ES_R
Errored second ratio
SES_C
SES_R
ESA_C
ESA_R
ESB_C
ESB_R
CSES_C
UAS_C
UAS_R
SEFS_C
SEFS_R
Severely errored seconds
Severely errored second ratio
Errored seconds type A
Errored second type A ratio
Errored seconds type B
Errored second type B ratio
Consecutive SES periods
Unavailable seconds
Unavailable seconds error ratio
Severely errored framing seconds
Severely errored framing second ratio
:SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:SECTion:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the Section parameters from GR-253 analysis of received data. The
parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under :SENSe:ANALysis:GR253A:SECTion.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:GR253A:SECTion:ALL?
:SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:HPPLM
This command enables or disables the inclusion of Path Label Mismatch errors in the analysis of received
signals. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:HPPLM?
:SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:HPPLM <Boolean>
OTS9100 User Manual
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:HPPLM:GENEric
This command enables or disables generic equipment evaluation in the detection of Path Label Mismatch
errors. If enabled, the detection of Generic Unequipped (code 01) does not cause a Path Label Mismatch
error. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:HPPLM:GENEric?
:SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:HPPLM:GENEric <Boolean>
:SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:HPUNEQ
This command enables or disables the inclusion of Path Label Unequipped errors in the analysis of
received signals. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:HPUNEQ?
:SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:HPUNEQ <Boolean>
:SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:LABEl:EXPEcted
This command sets the comparison value for Path Label Mismatch analysis. The query form returns the
current setting.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:LABEl:EXPEcted?
:SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:LABEl:EXPEcted <NR1>
:SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted
This command sets the data sequence length and data byte values against which the receiver compares
the received signal for path Trace Identifier Mismatch measurements. The data bytes are formatted as a
standard IEEE-488 data block. The query form returns the current settings of these parameters.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted?
:SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted <Enum> ,<Block>
Parameters
L1B
Description
Constant 8-bit data
L16B
L16FREE
L64B
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, 0-filled with CRC
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, arbitrary format
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, space-filled with CR/LF
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, arbitrary format
L64FREE
3-24
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted:TYPE
This command sets the data sequence length used by the receiver for path Trace Identifier Mismatch
measurements. This parameter may also be set by the :SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted
command. The query form returns the current setting of this parameter.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted:TYPE?
:SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted:TYPE <Enum>
Parameters
L1B
Description
Constant 8-bit data
L16B
L16FREE
L64B
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, 0-filled with CRC
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, arbitrary format
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, space-filled with CR/LF
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, arbitrary format
L64FREE
:SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted:VALUe
This command sets the data byte values used by the receiver for path Trace Identifier Mismatch
measurements. The data bytes are formatted as a standard IEEE-488 data block. These values may also
be set by the :SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted command. The query form returns the current
values.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted:VALUe?
:SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted:VALUe <Block>
:SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted:VALUe:STRIng
This command sets the data byte values used by the receiver for path Trace Identifier Mismatch
measurements. The byte values are formatted as an ASCII string. These values may also be set by the
:SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted command. The query form returns the current values.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted:VALUe:STRIng?
:SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:EXPEcted:VALUe:STRIng <String>
OTS9100 User Manual
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:TIM
This command enables or disables the inclusion of path Trace Identifier Mismatch errors in the analysis of
received signals. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:TIM?
:SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:PATH:TRACe:TIM <Boolean>
:SENSe:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:EXPEcted
This command sets the data sequence length and data byte values against which the receiver compares
the received signal for Trace Identifier Mismatch measurements. The data bytes are formatted as a
standard IEEE-488 data block. The query form returns the current settings of these parameters.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:EXPEcted?
:SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:EXPEcted <Enum> ,<Block>
Parameters
L1B
Description
Constant 8-bit data
L16B
L16FREE
L64B
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, 0-filled with CRC
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, arbitrary format
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, space-filled with CR/LF
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, arbitrary format
L64FREE
:SENSe:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:EXPEcted:TYPE
This command sets the data sequence length used by the receiver for Trace Identifier Mismatch
measurements. This parameter may also be set by the :SENSe:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:EXPEcted
command. The query form returns the current setting of this parameter.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:EXPEcted:TYPE?
:SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:EXPEcted:TYPE <Enum>
Parameters
L1B
Description
Constant 8-bit data
L16B
L16FREE
L64B
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, 0-filled with CRC
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, arbitrary format
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, space-filled with CR/LF
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, arbitrary format
L64FREE
3-26
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:EXPEcted:VALUe
This command sets the data byte values used by the receiver for Trace Identifier Mismatch
measurements. The data bytes are formatted as a standard IEEE-488 data block. These values may also
be set by the :SENSe:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:EXPEcted command. The query form returns the
current values.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:EXPEcted:VALUe?
:SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:EXPEcted:VALUe <Block>
:SENSe:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:EXPEcted:VALUe:STRIng
This command sets the data byte values used by the receiver for Trace Identifier Mismatch
measurements. The byte values are formatted as an ASCII string. These values may also be set by the
:SENSe:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:EXPEcted command. The query form returns the current values.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:EXPEcted:VALUe:STRIng?
:SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:EXPEcted:VALUe:STRIng <String>
:SENSe:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:TIM
This command enables or disables the inclusion of Trace Identifier Mismatch errors in the analysis of
received signals. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:TIM?
:SENSe<slot>:ANALysis:SECTion:TRACe:TIM <Boolean>
:SENSe:DATA:AUTOscan:STRUcture
This query returns the signal structure found in the received signal.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:DATA:AUTOscan:STRUcture?
Parameters
Description
192
48
12
3
1
0
Bulk data at 10Gb/s
Bulk data at 2.5Gb/s
Bulk data at 622Mb/s
Bulk data at 155Mb/s
Bulk data at 51Mb/s
Mixed signal structure
OTS9100 User Manual
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:DATA:CHANnel
This command selects the active channel for the received signal. The query form returns the current
setting.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:DATA:CHANnel?
:SENSe<slot>:DATA:CHANnel <NR1>
:SENSe:DATA:IP:PAYLoad:PATTern
This command selects the test pattern inserted as IP payload into the received signal. The query form
returns the current setting.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:DATA:IP:PAYLoad:PATTern?
:SENSe<slot>:DATA:IP:PAYLoad:PATTern <Parameter>
Parameters
PRBS31A
PRBS31I
USER
Description
ITU standard PRBS 2^31-1 pattern
Inverted PRBS 2^31-1 pattern
Constant 16-bit user-specified data
:SENSe:DATA:IP:PAYLoad:PATTern:UDATA
This command specifies the data value inserted into the received signal when constant data is selected
for the IP test pattern. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:DATA:IP:PAYLoad:PATTern:UDATA?
:SENSe<slot>:DATA:IP:PAYLoad:PATTern:UDATA <NR1>
:SENSe:DATA:IP:STReam:INDEX
This query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:DATA:IP:STReam:INDEX?
:SENSe:DATA:PATH:TRACe
This query returns the most recently received J1 path trace type (length) and data. See the command
:SOURce:DATA:PATH:TRACe for the formats of the enum and block values returned. The data bytes are
returned in standard IEEE-488 block data format.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:DATA:PATH:TRACe?
3-28
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:DATA:PATH:TRACe:TYPE
This query returns the most recently received J1 path trace type (length). See the command
:SOURce:DATA:PATH:TRACe:TYPE for the format of the enum value returned.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:DATA:PATH:TRACe:TYPE?
:SENSe:DATA:PATH:TRACe:VALUe
This query returns the most recently received J1 path trace data. The data bytes are returned in IEEE-
488 block data format.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:DATA:PATH:TRACe:VALUe?
:SENSe:DATA:PATH:TRACe:VALUe:STRIng
This query returns the most recently received J1 path trace data. The data is returned as an ASCII string.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:DATA:PATH:TRACe:VALUe:STRIng?
:SENSe:DATA:PAYLoad:PATTern
This command selects the test pattern for the received signal. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:DATA:PAYLoad:PATTern?
:SENSe<slot>:DATA:PAYLoad:PATTern <Enum>
Parameters
PRBS15A
PRBS15I
PRBS23A
PRBS23I
PRBS31A
PRBS31I
ZEROs
Description
ITU standard PRBS 2^15-1 pattern
Inverted PRBS 2^15-1 pattern
ITU standard PRBS 2^23-1 pattern
Inverted PRBS 2^23-1 pattern
ITU standard PRBS 2^31-1 pattern
Inverted PRBS 2^31-1 pattern
Constant zero data
ONEs
Constant one data
USER
LIVE
Constant 8-bit user-specified
Live data
OTS9100 User Manual
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:DATA:PAYLoad:PATTern:UDATA
This command selects the fixed test pattern for the received signal. The query form returns the current
setting.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:DATA:PAYLoad:PATTern:UDATA?
:SENSe<slot>:DATA:PAYLoad:PATTern:UDATA <NR1>
:SENSe:DATA:POH:ALL
This query returns a block of data representing the Path Overhead data from an STS-1 in the received
signal. There are 9 bytes in the block returned. For SONET, these bytes are J1 B3 C2 G1 F2 H4 Z3 Z4
Z5; for SDH, these bytes are J1 B3 C2 G1 F2 H4 F3 K3 N1.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:DATA:POH:ALL? [<NR1>]
:SENSe:DATA:POH:BYTE
This query returns a single byte of data from the Path Overhead data for the selected active channel in
the received signal. The numeric parameter, with range 1 to 9, specifies the byte in the order listed under
:SENSe:DATA:POH:ALL.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:DATA:POH:BYTE? <NR1>
:SENSe:DATA:POH:BYTE:C2A
This query returns the Path Label (C2) byte from the selected active channel in the received signal.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:DATA:POH:BYTE:C2A?
:SENSe:DATA:POS:SCRambling
This command enables or disables the packet over sonnet scrambling. The query form returns the current
setting. <Slot> is an optional number that specifies the module slot containing the device that is the
target of the command; if omitted, it defaults to the lowest-numbered slot containing an applicable device.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:DATA:POS:SCRambling?
:SENSe<slot>:DATA:POS:SCRambling <Boolean>
3-30
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:DATA:RATE
This query returns the input signal rate expected by the OTS-9000 receiver.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:DATA:RATE?
Parameters
Description
G10A
10 Gb/s (OC-192 or STM-64)
:SENSe:DATA:SECTion:TRACe
This query returns the most recently received J0 section trace type (length) and data. The data bytes are
returned in standard IEEE-488 block data format.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:DATA:SECTion:TRACe?
:SENSe:DATA:SECTion:TRACe:TYPE
This query returns the most recently received J0 section trace type (length).
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:DATA:SECTion:TRACe:TYPE?
:SENSe:DATA:SECTion:TRACe:VALUe
This query returns the most recently received J0 section trace data. The data bytes are returned in IEEE-
488 block data format.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:DATA:SECTion:TRACe:VALUe?
:SENSe:DATA:SECTion:TRACe:VALUe:STRIng
This query returns the most recently received J0 section trace data. The data is returned as an ASCII
string.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:DATA:SECTion:TRACe:VALUe:STRIng?
OTS9100 User Manual
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:DATA:SPE:STUFfing
This command controls the receiver’s treatment of columns 30 and 59, which can be used for SPE fixed
byte stuffing. When enabled, these columns are treated as stuffing columns and are not considered part
of the payload. When disabled, columns 30 and 59 are treated as part of the payload. This command is
applicable only to STS-1 structure. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:DATA:SPE:STUFfing?
:SENSe<slot>:DATA:SPE:STUFfing? <Boolean>
:SENSe:DATA:STRUcture
This command sets the receiver structure. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:DATA:STRUcture?
:SENSe<slot>:DATA:STRUcture <Enum>
Parameters
G10C
G2P5C
M622C
M155C
M51A
Description
Bulk data at 10 Gb/s
Bulk data at 2.5 Gb/s
Bulk data at 622 Mb/s
Bulk data at 155 Mb/s
Bulk data at 51 Mb/s (SONET only)
:SENSe:DATA:TOH:STM1A:ALL
This query returns a block of data representing the Transport Overhead data from an STM-1 in the
received signal.
There are 81 bytes - three groups of 27 - in the block returned, representing the STS-1 overhead data for
each STS-1 in the STM-1.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:DATA:TOH:STM1A:ALL?
:SENSe:DATA:TOH:STS1A:ALL
This query returns a block of data representing the Transport Overhead data from an STS-1 in the
received signal.
There are 27 bytes in the block returned. These correspond to the overhead bytes A1, A2, J0, B1, E1, F1,
D1..D3, H1..H3, B2, K1, K2, D4..D12, S1, Z2, E2.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:DATA:TOH:STS1A:ALL? [<NR1>]
3-32
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:INPUt:THREshold
This command sets the receiver input offset threshold value in millivolts for the OTS receiver. The query
form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:INPUt:THREshold?
:SENSe<slot>:INPUt:THREshold <NR1>
:SENSe:INPut:THReshold:LOS
This command sets the LOS threshold value. The query form returns the currently active setting for the
LOS threshold.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:INPut:THReshold:LOS?
:SENSe<slot>:INPut:THReshold:LOS <NR1>
:SENSe:MEASure:APSTime:CONDition
This command sets the condition tested for APS switch time measurement. The query form returns the
current setting
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:APSTime:CONDition?
:SENSe<slot>:MEASure:APSTime:CONDition <Enum>
Parameters
LOS
OOF
Description
Loss of Signal
Severely Errored Frame / Out of Frame
B1 errors
B2 errors
B3 errors
Bit (payload) errors
Line AIS / MS-AIS
Path AIS
Line RDI / MS-RDI
Path RDI
B1BIP
B2BIP
B3BIP
BIT
AIS_L
AIS_P
RDI_L
RDI_P
OTS9100 User Manual
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:MEASure:APSTime:DETEcted
This query returns one or more values to indicate the receiver events detected during the most recently
performed APS measurement.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:APSTime:DETEcted?
Parameters
NONE
LOS
Description
No conditions were detected
Loss of Signal
OOF
Severely Errored Frame / Out of Frame
B1 errors
B2 errors
B1BIP
B2BIP
B3BIP
BIT
AIS_L
AIS_P
RDI_L
RDI_P
B3 errors
Bit (payload) errors
Line AIS / MS-AIS
Path AIS
Line RDI / MS-RDI
Path RDI
:SENSe:MEASure:APSTime:MAXTime
This command sets the maximum time for APS switch time measurement. The query form returns the
current setting
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:APSTime:MAXTime?
:SENSe<slot>:MEASure:APSTime:MAXTime <NR1>
:SENSe:MEASure:APSTime:RUN
This command starts (1) an APS switch time measurement, or stops (0) any measurement in progress.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:APSTime:RUN <Boolean>
:SENSe:MEASure:APSTime:STATus
This query returns the status of the most recently performed APS switch time measurement.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:APSTime:STATus?
Parameters
INVALID
BUSY
Description
No valid result is available
An APS time measurement is in process
The current APS time test passed
The current APS time test failed
PASS
FAIL
3-34
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:MEASure:APSTime:THREshold
This command sets the threshold time for APS switch time measurement. If the measured switch time
exceeds the threshold time, the test fails. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:APSTime:THREshold?
:SENSe<slot>:MEASure:APSTime:THREshold <NR1>
:SENSe:MEASure:APSTime:VALUe
This query returns, as a NR1 value, the APS switch time value measured by the most recently performed
APS measurement. The units for the value can be specified as milliseconds, microseconds, or frames. If
the unit specification is omitted, the unit defaults to milliseconds.
Syntax: :SENSe:MEASure:APSTime:VALUe? <Enum>
Parameters
FRAMES
USEC
Description
The current APS time value in frames
The current APS time value in microseconds
The current APS time in milliseconds
MSEC
NOTE: This command is only targeted for a receiver card. Unlike other cards, you cannot target the
optical card directly by using the slot number of the optical card.
:SENSe:MEASure:HDLC:FRAMes
This query returns the value of the specified result parameter in NR1 format.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:HDLC:FRAMes? <Parameter>
Parameters
GFCS
BFCS
ABORted
INValid
Description
Count of HDLC frames received with good FCS
Count of HDLC frames received with bad FCS
Count of aborted HDLC frames
Count of invalid HDLC frames
MINSize
Count of HDLC frames received with minimum size violation
:SENSe:MEASure:HDLC:FRAMes:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the SENSe :MEASure:HDLC:FRAMes? query.
The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under
:SENSe:MEASure:HDLC:FRAMes values are returned in NR1 format.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:HDLC:FRAMes:ALL?
OTS9100 User Manual
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:MEASure:HDLC:BYTes
This query returns the number of HDLC bytes received with good FCS.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:HDLC:BYTes?
:SENSe:MEASure:IP:PACKets
This query returns the value of the specified result parameter in NR1 format.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:IP:PACKets? <Parameter>
Parameters
TOTal
Description
Total count of IP bytes received
GOOD
BAD
FREE
PAYLoad
Count IP bytes received with good checksum
Count of IP bytes received with bad checksum
Count of IP Packet received with no payload errors
Count of IP Packet received with payload errors
:SENSe:MEASure:IP:PACKets:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the SENSe :MEASure:IP:PACKets? query. The
parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under :SENSe:MEASure:IP:PACKets values
are returned in NR1 format.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:IP:PACKets:ALL?
:SENSe:MEASure:LINE:CUMUlative
This query returns the value of the specified result parameter for the most recent test.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:LINE:CUMUlative? <Enum>
Parameters
B2_C
Description
B2 errors
B2_ES
B2_ER
B2 errored seconds
B2 error ratio
REI_C
REI errors
REI_ES
REI_ER
AIS_ES
RDI_ES
REI errored seconds
REI error ratio
AIS errored seconds
RDI errored seconds
:SENSe:MEASure:LINE:CUMUlative:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the :SENSE:MEASURE:LINE:CUMULATIVE?
query. The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under
:SENSE:MEASURE:LINE:CUMULATIVE.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:LINE:CUMUlative:ALL?
3-36
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:MEASure:LINE:WINDow
This query returns the value of the specified result parameter as measured during the most recent 'N'
seconds. The duration 'N' of the measurement window is set by the :SENSE:MEASURE:WINDOW:SIZE
command.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:LINE:WINDow? <Enum>
Parameters
B2_C
Description
B2 errors
B2_ES
B2_ER
B2 errored seconds
B2 error ratio
REI_C
REI errors
REI_ES
REI_ER
AIS_ES
RDI_ES
REI errored seconds
REI error ratio
Loss-of-signal errored seconds
Loss-of-frame errored seconds
:SENSeMEASure:LINE:WINDow:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the :SENSE:MEASURE:LINE:WINDOW? query,
as measured during the most recent N-second period. The parameters are returned in the order in which
they are listed under :SENSE:MEASURE:LINE:WINDOW.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:LINE:WINDow:ALL?
:SENSe:MEASure:PATH:CUMUlative
This query returns the value of the specified result parameter for the most recent test. Ratios are returned
in NR3 format; other values are returned in NR1 format.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:PATH:CUMUlative? <Enum>
Parameters
B3_C
Description
B3 errors
B3_ES
B3 errored seconds
B3_ER
B3 error ratio
REI_C
Path REI errors
REI_ES
REI_ER
AIS_ES
Path REI errored seconds
Path REI error ratio
Path AIS errored seconds
Path RDI errored seconds
Path Label Mismatch errored seconds
Path Label Unequipped errored seconds
Loss of Synch errored seconds
Loss of Pointer errored seconds
Path trace mismatch errored seconds
Payload errors
RDI_ES
PLM_ES
UNEQ_ES
LSS_ES
LOP_ES
J1TIM_ES
PAYL_C
PAYL_ES
PAYL_ER
RDIPAY_ES
Payload errored seconds
Payload error ratio
Path RDI (Payload) errored seconds
RDICON_ES Path RDI (Connectivity) errored seconds
RDISRV_ES
Path RDI (Server) errored seconds
OTS9100 User Manual
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:MEASure:PATH:CUMUlative:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the :SENSe:MEASure:PATH:CUMUlative? query.
The parameters are returned in the order in which they are listed under the heading
:SENSe:MEASure:PATH:CUMUlative. Ratios are returned in NR3 format; other values are returned in
NR1 format
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:PATH:CUMUlative:ALL?
:SENSe:MEASure:PATH:WINDow
This query returns the value of the specified result parameter as measured during the most recent 'N'
seconds. The duration 'N' of the measurement window is set by the :SENSe:MEASure:WINDow:SIZE
command.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:PATH:WINDow? <Enum>
Parameters
B3_C
Description
B3 errors
B3_ES
B3 errored seconds
B3_ER
B3 error ratio
REI_C
Path REI errors
REI_ES
REI_ER
AIS_ES
Path REI errored seconds
Path REI error ratio
Path AIS errored seconds
Path RDI errored seconds
Path Label Mismatch errored seconds
Path Label Unequipped errored seconds
Loss of Synch errored seconds
Loss of Pointer errored seconds
Path trace mismatch errored seconds
Payload errors
RDI_ES
PLM_ES
UNEQ_ES
LSS_ES
LOP_ES
J1TIM_ES
PAYL_C
PAYL_ES
PAYL_ER
RDIPAY_ES
Payload errored seconds
Payload error ratio
Path RDI (Payload) errored seconds
RDICON_ES Path RDI (Connectivity) errored seconds
RDISRV_ES Path RDI (Server) errored seconds
:SENSe:MEASure:PATH:WINDow:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the :SENSe:MEASure:PATH:WINDow? query, as
measured during the most recent N-second period. The parameters are returned in the order in which
they are listed under :SENSe:MEASure:PATH:WINDow. Ratios are returned in NR3 format; other values
are returned in NR1 format.
Syntax: :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:PATH:WINDow:ALL?
3-38
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:MEASure:SECTion:CUMUlative
This query returns the value of the specified result parameter for the most recent test.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:SECTion:CUMUlative? <Enum>
Parameters
B1_C
Description
B1 errors
B1_ES
B1 errored seconds
B1_ER
B1 error ratio
FAS_C
Framing errors
FAS_ES
FAS_ER
LOS_ES
LOF_ES
OOF_ES
RSTIM_ES
Framing errored seconds
Framing error ratio
Loss-of-signal errored seconds
Loss-of-frame errored seconds
Out-of-frame errored seconds
RS trace mismatch errored seconds
:SENSe:MEASure:SECTion:CUMUlative:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the
:SENSE:MEASURE:SECTION:CUMULATIVE? query. The parameters are returned in the order in which
they are listed under :SENSE:MEASURE:SECTION:CUMULATIVE.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:SECTion:CUMUlative:ALL?
:SENSe:MEASure:SECTion:WINDow
This query returns the value of the specified result parameter as measured during the most recent 'N'
seconds. The duration 'N' of the measurement window is set by the :SENSE:MEASURE:WINDOW:SIZE
command.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:SECTion:WINDow? <Enum>
Parameters
B1_C
Description
B1 errors
B1_ES
B1 errored seconds
B1_ER
B1 error ratio
FAS_C
Framing errors
FAS_ES
FAS_ER
LOS_ES
LOF_ES
OOF_ES
RSTIM_ES
Framing errored seconds
Framing error ratio
Loss-of-signal errored seconds
Loss-of-frame errored seconds
Out-of-frame errored seconds
RS trace mismatch errored seconds
OTS9100 User Manual
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:MEASure:SECTion:WINDow:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the :SENSE:MEASURE:SECTION:WINDOW?
query, as measured during the most recent N-second period. The parameters are returned in the order in
which they are listed under :SENSE:MEASURE:SECTION:CUMULATIVE.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:SECTion:WINDow:ALL?
:SENSe:MEASure:WINDow:CLEAR
This command clears the data in the sliding measurement window.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:WINDow:CLEAR
:SENSe:MEASure:WINDow:LEVEL
This query returns the number of seconds of measurement data included in the current windowed-
measurement calculations. Normally this value will be the same as the window size; clearing the window
data or changing the window size causes the sliding window to refill as new measurements are made.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:WINDow:LEVEL?
:SENSe:MEASure:WINDow:SIZE
This command sets the duration in seconds of the interval over which windowed results measurements
are calculated. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:MEASure:WINDow:SIZE?
:SENSe<slot>:MEASure:WINDow:SIZE <NR1>
:SENSe:OPTical:INPut:OVERload
This query returns a Boolean value indicating whether or not the optical power has exceeded its
maximum threshold. A return value of 1 indicates that optical power is overloaded, while a return value of
0 indicates that optical power is at an acceptable level. This command and query may be directed either
to the OTS Optics card or to the associated Receiver card.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:OPTical:INPut:OVERload?
3-40
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:OPTical:THReshold:AUTO
This command sets the auto-correct option for the receiver set point control to either on (1) or off (0).
When set with to the on (1) value, the system sets the receiver point with its default value, and disallows
any further manual setting. When set to the off (0) value, the user can manually adjust the receiver set
point. The query version of this action returns the current setting for the auto-correct value.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:OPTical:THReshold:AUTO?
:SENSe<slot>:OPTical:THReshold:AUTO <Boolean>
:SENSe:OVERhead:MONItor:CHANnel
This command selects the particular channel of the received signal from which overhead data is
monitored. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:OVERhead:MONItor:CHANnel?
:SENSe<slot>:OVERhead:MONItor:CHANnel <NR1>
:SENSe:SIGNal:STANdard
This command sets individual OTS9100 modules to the SONET or SDH signal mode. The query form
returns the current setting.
Syntax :SENSe <Slot>:SIGNal:STANdard?
:SENSe <Slot>:SIGNal:STANdard SONET SDH
Parameters
SONET
SDH
Description
Set module to SONET signal mode
Set module to SDH signal mode
Set module to BERT
BERT
OTS9100 User Manual
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:STATus:LEDS
This query reports the occurrence of various error and status conditions typically shown by front-panel
status indicator lights. The response is an integer number representing the time of the most recent status
change, followed by strings identifying the active conditions. The strings are listed in the table below. An
optional numeric parameter specifies a time value, such that only events that occurred after that time are
reported. If the time parameter is not present, it defaults to zero, corresponding to the start of the most
recent test.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:STATus:LEDS? [<NR1>]
Condition
Signal Not Present
LOS
LOF
OOF
String
optical-los
los
lof
oof
B1
fas
j0-tim
ais-l
b2
Word and bit value
Parameter 1, bit value 1 (hex 1)
Parameter 2, bit value 1 (hex 1)
Parameter 2, bit value 2 (hex 2)
Parameter 2, bit value 4 (hex 4)
Parameter 2, bit value 8 (hex 8)
Parameter 2, bit value 16 (hex 10)
Parameter 2, bit value 32 (hex 20)
Parameter 3, bit value 1 (hex 1)
Parameter 3, bit value 2 (hex 2)
Parameter 4, bit value 1 (hex 1)
Parameter 4, bit value 2 (hex 2)
All parameters 0 (hex 0)
B1
FAS
RS-TIM / J0 Mismatch
MS AIS / AIS-L
B2
MS RDI / RDI-L
MS REI / REI-L
No conditions set
rdi-l
rei-l
(none)
:SENSe:STATus:LEDS:HEXadecimal
This query is an alternative form of :SENSe:STATus:LEDS. It returns a time value and four integer values
that represent the status conditions listed in the table above. The parameters are returned as
hexadecimal (base 16) numbers. Each condition appears as a bit value in one of the four parameter
values returned; the particular parameter and bit value appears in the table above. Note that the high-
order eight bits of each parameter identify the parameter in question and do not represent LED status
conditions. The optional time parameter specifies the earliest time of interest.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:STATus:LEDS:HEXadecimal? [<NR1>]
:SENSe:STATus:LEDS:NUMEric
This query is an alternative form of :SENSe:STATus:LEDS. It returns a time value and four integer values
that represent the status conditions listed in the table above. The parameters are returned as decimal
numbers. Each condition appears as a bit value in one of the four parameter values returned; the
particular parameter and bit value appears in the table above. Note that the high-order eight bits of each
parameter identify the parameter in question and do not represent LED status conditions. The optional
time parameter specifies the earliest time of interest.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:STATus:LEDS:NUMEric? [<NR1>]
3-42
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:STATus:PATH:LEDS
This query reports the occurence of various path-layer error and status conditions typically shown by
front-panel status indicator lights. The response is an integer number representing the time of the most
recent status change, followed by strings identifying the active conditions. The strings are listed in the
table below. An optional numeric parameter specifies a time value, such that only events that occurred
after that time are reported. If the time parameter is not present, it defaults to zero, corresponding to the
start of the most recent test.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:STATus:PATH:LEDS? [<NR1>]
Condition
String
ais-p
lop-p
b3
Word and bit value
AIS-P / AU-AIS
LOP-P / AU-LOP
B3
Parameter 1, bit value 1 (hex 1)
Parameter 1, bit value 4 (hex 4)
Parameter 1, bit value 2 (hex 2)
Parameter 2, bit value 1 (RDI-P), 2 (ERDI-P Payload),
4 (ERDI-P Server), 8 (ERDI-P Connectivity)
Parameter 2, bit value 16 (hex 10)
Parameter 1, bit value 128 (hex 80)
Parameter 1, bit value 64 (hex 40)
Parameter 1, bit value 256 (hex 100)
Parameter 3, bit value 2 (hex 2)
Parameter 3, bit value 1 (hex 1)
All parameters 0 (Hex 0)
RDI-P (all) / HP-RDI (all)
rdi-p
REI-P / HP-REI
TIM-P / HP-TIM
UNEQ-P / HP-UNEQ
PLM-P / HP-PLM
LSS
rei-p
tim-p
uneq-p
plm-p
lss
Bit Error / TSE
No conditions set
bit
(none)
:SENSe:STATus:PATH:LEDS:HEXadecimal
This query is an alternative form of :SENSe:STATus:PATH:LEDS. It returns a time value and three
integer values that represent the status conditions listed in the table above. The parameters are returned
as hexadecimal (base 16) numbers. Each condition appears as a bit value in one of the four parameter
values returned; the particular parameter and bit value appears in the table above. Note that the high-
order eight bits of each parameter identify the parameter in question and do not represent LED status
conditions. The optional time parameter specifies the earliest time of interest.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:STATus:PATH:LEDS:HEXadecimal? [<NR1>]
:SENSe:STATus:PATH:LEDS:NUMEric
This query is an alternative form of :SENSe:STATus:PATH:LEDS. It returns a time value and three
integer values that represent the status conditions listed in the table above. The parameters are returned
as decimal numbers. Each condition appears as a bit value in one of the four parameter values returned;
the particular parameter and bit value appears in the table above. Note that the high-order eight bits of
each parameter identify the parameter in question and do not represent LED status conditions. The
optional time parameter specifies the earliest time of interest.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:STATus:PATH:LEDS:NUMEric? [<NR1>]
OTS9100 User Manual
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:TEST:DESCription
This command sets the description text that is written to the results file at the start of a text. The text may
be up to 127 characters long. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:TEST:DESCription?
:SENSe<slot>:TEST:DESCription <String>
:SENSe:TEST:MODE
This command sets the way the OTSsystem runs a test. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:TEST:MODE?
:SENSe<slot>:TEST:MODE <Enum>
Parameters
Description
CONTinuous The test runs continuously
TIMEd
REPEtitive
The test runs for a preset amount of time
The test runs for a preset time and then restarts
:SENSe:TEST:STATe
This command controls the OTSsystem's execution of a test. The query form returns the state of a
currently-executing test.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:TEST:STATe?
:SENSe<slot>:TEST:STATe <Enum>
Parameters
RUN
Description
Start a test
PAUSe
RESUme
END
Pause the test in progress
Resume the test in progress
Stop the test
RESTart
STARTING
STOPPING
Stop the test and start a new test
A test is starting (status query only)
A test is stopping (status query only)
:SENSe:TEST:TIME
This command sets the time duration for a test. The query form returns the currently programmed time.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:TEST:TIME?
:SENSe<slot>:TEST:TIME <NR1>
3-44
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SENSe:TEST:TIME:ELAPsed
This query returns the time since the start of the current test.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:TEST:TIME:ELAPsed?
:SENSe:TRIGger:MODE
This command sets the condition that will produce a trigger output from the OTS-9000 receiver. The
query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SENSe<slot>:TRIGger:MODE?
:SENSe<slot>:TRIGger:MODE <Enum>
Parameters
OFF
Description
The trigger output is disabled
ANOMaly
DEFEct
PAYload
AD
AP
DP
A trigger occurs when an anomaly is received
A trigger occurs when a defect is received
A trigger occurs when a payload data error is received
A trigger occurs when an anomaly or defect is received
A trigger occurs when an anomaly or payload data error is received
A trigger occurs when a defect or payload data error is received
A trigger occurs when an anomaly, defect, or payload data error is received
ADP
:SOURce:CLOCk:SOURce
This command selects the timing source for the signal generated by the OTS-9000 transmitter. The query
form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:CLOCk:SOURce?
:SOURce<slot>:CLOCk:SOURce <Enum>
Parameters
INTErnal
EXTErnal
Description
Transmitter timing is based on the OTS-9000's internal reference
Transmitter timing is derived from an external signal applied to the clock/trigger card
:SOURce:DATA:BACKground:STRUcture
This command sets the background structure of the signal generated by the OTS-9000 transmitter. The
query form returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SOURce<slot>:DATA:BACKground:STRUcture?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:BACKground:STRUcture <Enum>
Parameters
G10C
G2P5C
M622C
M155C
M51A
Description
Bulk data at 10 Gb/s
Bulk data at 2.5 Gb/s
Bulk data at 622 Mb/s
Bulk data at 155 Mb/s
Bulk data at 51 Mb/s (SONET only)
OTS9100 User Manual
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:DATA:CHANnel
This command sets the active channel of the signal generated by the OTS-9000 transmitter. The query
form returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SOURce<slot>:DATA:CHANnel?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:CHANnel <NR1>
:SOURce:DATA:CHANnel:REPLicate
This command enables insertion of the active-channel payload into all channels of the generated signal.
When enabled, all channels contain identical payload data and the background-channel settings have no
effect. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SOURce<slot>:DATA:CHANnel:REPLicate?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:CHANnel:REPLicate <Boolean>
:SOURce:DATA:HDLC:IFRame:GAP
This query returns the HDLC inter frame gap.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:HDLC:IFRame:GAP?
:SOURce:DATA:IP:HEADer:ADDRess:DEST
This command sets the transmitter IP header destination address. The query form returns the current
settings. The first parameter specifies the first most significant byte. The last parameter specifies the
least significant byte.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:HEADer:ADDRess:DEST?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:HEADer:ADDRess:DEST <NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1>
:SOURce:DATA:IP:HEADer:ADDRess:SOURce
This command sets the transmitter IP header source address. The query form returns the current
settings. The first parameter specifies the first most significant byte. The last parameter specifies the
least significant byte.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:HEADer:ADDRess:SOURce?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:HEADer:ADDRess:SOURce <NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1>
3-46
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:DATA:IP:HEADer:FLAG
This query returns the transmitter IP header flag. The value returned is formatted as NR1 parameter.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:HEADer:FLAG?
:SOURce:DATA:IP:HEADer:FRAG:OFFSet
This query returns the transmitter IP header fragment offset. The value returned is formatted as NR1
parameter.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:HEADer:FRAG:OFFSet?
:SOURce:DATA:IP:HEADer:ID
This query returns the transmitter IP header identification. The value returned is formatted as NR1
parameter.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:HEADer:ID?
:SOURce:DATA:IP:HEADer:PROTocol
This command sets the transmitter IP header protocol. The query form returns the transmitter IP header
protocol.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:HEADer:PROTocol?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:HEADer:PROTocol <NR1>
:SOURce:DATA:IP:HEADer:PSIZe
This command sets the transmitter IP header packet size. The query form returns the transmitter IP
header packet size.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:HEADer:PSIZe?
OTS9100 User Manual
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:DATA:IP:HEADer:TSERVice
This command sets the IP header type of service. The query form returns the IP header type of service.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:HEADer:TSERVice?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:HEADer:TSERVice <NR1>
:SOURce:DATA:IP:HEADer:TTLive
This command sets the transmitter IP header time to live .The query form returns the transmitter IP
header time to live.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:HEADer:TTLive?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:HEADer:TTLive <NR1>
:SOURce:DATA:IP:HEADer:VERSion
This query returns the IP header version. The value returned is formatted as NR1 parameter.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:HEADer:VERSion?
:SOURce:DATA:IP:PAYLoad:PATTern
This command selects the test pattern inserted as IP payload into the transmitted signal. The query form
returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:PAYLoad:PATTern?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:PAYLoad:PATTern <Parameter>
Parameters
PRBS31A
USER
Description
ITU standard PRBS 2^31-1 pattern
Constant 16-bit user-specified data
:SOURce:DATA:IP:PAYLoad:PATTern:UDATa
This command specifies the data value inserted into the transmitted signal when constant data is selected
for the IP test pattern. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:PAYLoad:PATTern:UDATa?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:PAYLoad:PATTern:UDATa <NR1>
3-48
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:DATA:IP:STReam:INDEX
This query form returns the transmitter sub stream index.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:STReam:INDEX?
:SOURce:DATA:IP:TRAFfic
This command sets the transmitter IP traffic state. The query form returns the IP traffic state.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:TRAFfic?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:IP:TRAFfic <Boolean>
:SOURce:DATA:POS:SCRambling
This command enables or disables the packet over SONET scrambling. The query form returns the
current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:POS:SCRambling?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:POS:SCRambling <Boolean>
:SOURce:DATA:OVERhead:PASSthru
This command controls the source of transmitted overhead data in Through Mode. The first parameter
specifies an overhead data field; the second selects whether that field's data comes from the received
signal (ON) or is generated by the OTS transmitter (OFF). The query form returns the current setting for
the specified field.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:OVERhead:PASSthru? <Enum>
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:OVERhead:PASSthru <Enum> ,<Boolean>
Parameters
APS
DCC_S
DCC_L
E1A
Description
K1 and K2 (APS) bytes (bit value 16 in ...:ALL command)
D1 through D3 (Section DCC) bytes (bit value 8)
D4 through D12 (Line DCC) bytes (bit value 32)
E1 byte (bit value 2)
E2A
E2 byte (bit value 512)
F1A
F1 byte (bit value 4)
J0A
M1A
J0 (Section trace) byte (bit value 1)
M1 byte (bit value 128)
S1A
S1 byte (bit value 64)
Z2A
Z2 byte (bit value 256)
OTS9100 User Manual
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:DATA:OVERhead:PASSthru:ALL
This command controls the source of transmitted overhead data in Through Mode. The parameter is a
numeric value in which each bit enables retransmission of received data for one specific overhead field.
The bit values are shown under :SOURCE:DATA:OVERHEAD:PASSTHROUGH. The query form returns
the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:OVERhead:PASSthru:ALL?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:OVERhead:PASSthru:ALL <NR1>
:SOURce:DATA:PARIty:LOOP
This command enables the local calculation of B1 and B2 parity bits when the transmitter is in Through
Mode. When this function is enabled, the B1 and B2 bits are calculated from the payload value; when it is
disabled, the B1 and B2 bits have the values of the received B1 and B2 bits. This setting has no effect
when the payload is internally generated. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:PARIty:LOOP?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:PARIty:LOOP <Boolean>
Parameters
THRU
Description
B1 and B2 bit values are taken from the received signal
B1 and B2 bit values are regenerated from the transmitted data
REGEN
FORCE_THRU
B1 and B2 bit values are taken from the received signal, independent of the
setting of this parameter
FORCE_REGEN
B1 and B2 bit values are regenerated from the transmitted data, independent of
the setting of this parameter
:SOURce:DATA:PATH:OVERhead:PASSthru
This command controls the source of transmitted path overhead data in Through Mode. The first
parameter specifies a path overhead data field; the second selects whether that field's data comes from
the received signal (ON) or is generated by the OTS transmitter (OFF). The query form returns the current
setting for the specified field.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:PATH:OVERhead:PASSthru? <Enum>
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:PATH:OVERhead:PASSthru <Enum> ,<Boolean>
Parameters
C2A
F2A
Description
C2 (path label) POH byte (bit value 131,072 in…:ALL command)
F2 POH byte (bit value 524,288)
F3A
G1A
F3 (Z3) POH byte (bit value 2,097,152)
G1 POH byte (bit value 262,144)
H4A
J1A
K3A
N1A
H4 POH byte (bit value 1,048,576)
J1 (path trace) POH byte (bit value 65,536)
K3 (Z4) POH byte (bit value 4,194,304)
N1 POH byte (bit value 8,388,608)
Payload data (bit value 16,777,216)
PAYload
3-50
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:DATA:PATH:OVERhead:PASSthru:ALL
This command controls the source of transmitted path overhead data in Through Mode. The parameter is
a numeric value in which each bit enables retransmission of received data for one specific path overhead
field. The bit values are shown under :SOURce:DATA:PATH:OVERhead:PASSthru. The query form
returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:PATH:OVERhead:PASSthru:ALL?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:PATH:OVERhead:PASSthru:ALL <NR1>
:SOURce:DATA:PATH:TRACe
This command sets the data sequence length and data byte values transmitted in the Path Trace (J1)
byte of the Path Overhead. The data bytes are formatted as a standard IEEE-488 data block. The query
form returns the current settings.
Syntax: :SOURce<slot>:DATA:PATH:TRACe?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:PATH:TRACe <Enum> ,<Block>
Parameters
L1B
Description
Constant 8-bit data
L16B
L16FREE
L64B
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, 0-filled with CRC
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, arbitrary format
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, space-filled with CR/LF
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, arbitrary format
L64FREE
:SOURce:DATA:PATH:TRACe:TYPE
This command sets the data sequence length transmitted in the Path (J1) byte of the Path Overhead. The
query form returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SOURce<slot>:DATA:PATH:TRACe:TYPE?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:PATH:TRACe:TYPE <Enum>
Parameters
L1B
Description
Constant 8-bit data
L16B
L16FREE
L64B
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, 0-filled with CRC
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, arbitrary format
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, space-filled with CR/LF
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, arbitrary format
L64FREE
OTS9100 User Manual
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:DATA:PATH:TRACe:VALUe
This command sets the data byte values transmitted in the Path Trace (J1) byte of the Path Overhead.
The data bytes are formatted as a standard IEEE-488 data block. The query form returns the current
values.
Syntax: :SOURce<slot>:DATA:PATH:TRACe:VALUe?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:PATH:TRACe:VALUe <Block>
:SOURce:DATA:PATH:TRACe:VALUe:STRIng
This command sets the data byte values transmitted in the Path Trace (J1) byte of the Path Overhead.
The data byte values are specified as an ASCII string. The query form returns the current values.
Syntax: :SOURce<slot>:DATA:PATH:TRACe:VALUe:STRIng?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:PATH:TRACe:VALUe:STRIng <String>
:SOURce:DATA:PAYLoad:BACKground:PATTern
This setting selects the background test pattern inserted as payload into the transmitted signal. The query
form returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SOURce<slot>:DATA:PAYLoad:BACKground:PATTern?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:PAYLoad:BACKground:PATTern <Enum>
Parameters
PRBS15A
PRBS15I
PRBS23A
PRBS23I
PRBS31A
PRBS31I
ZEROs
Description
ITU standard PRBS 2^15-1 pattern
Inverted PRBS 2^15-1 pattern
ITU standard PRBS 2^23-1 pattern
Inverted PRBS 2^23-1 pattern
ITU standard PRBS 2^31-1 pattern
Inverted PRBS 2^31-1 pattern
Constant zero data
ONEs
Constant one data
USER
LIVE
Constant 8-bit user-specified data
Live data
3-52
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:DATA:PAYLoad:BACKground:PATTern:UDATA
This command selects the background fixed test pattern for the Transmitter signal The query form returns
the current setting.
Syntax: :SOURce<slot>:DATA:PAYLoad:BACKground:PATTern:UDATA?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:PAYLoad:BACKground:PATTern:UDATA <NR1>
:SOURce:DATA:PAYLoad:PATTern
This setting selects the test pattern inserted as payload into the transmitted signal. The query form
returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:PAYLoad:PATTern?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:PAYLoad:PATTern <Enum>
Parameters
PRBS15A
PRBS15I
PRBS23A
PRBS23I
PRBS31A
PRBS31I
ZEROs
Description
ITU standard PRBS 2^15-1 pattern
Inverted PRBS 2^15-1 pattern
ITU standard PRBS 2^23-1 pattern
Inverted PRBS 2^23-1 pattern
ITU standard PRBS 2^31-1 pattern
Inverted PRBS 2^31-1 pattern
Constant zero data
ONEs
Constant one data
USER
LIVE
Constant 8-bit user-specified data
Live data
:SOURce:DATA:PAYLoad:PATTern:UDATA
This command selects the fixed test pattern for the Transmitter signal The query form returns the current
setting.
Syntax: :SOURce<slot>:DATA:PAYLoad:PATTern:UDATA?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:PAYLoad:PATTern:UDATA <NR1>
OTS9100 User Manual
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:DATA:POH:ALL
This command sets the values of all bytes in the generated STS-1 #1 Path Overhead data. The query
form returns the current setting. There are 9 bytes in the data block. For SONET, these bytes are J1 B3
C2 G1 F2 H4 Z3 Z4 N1; for SDH, these bytes are J1 B3 C2 G1 F2 H4 F3 K3 N1.
Syntax: :SOURce<slot>:DATA:POH:ALL? [<NR1>]
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:POH:ALL <NR1> ,<Block>
:SOURce:DATA:POH:BACKground:BYTE:C2A
This command sets the values of the C2 byte in the generated Path Overhead data in all background
(inactive) channels. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SOURce<slot>:DATA:POH:BACKground:BYTE:C2A?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:POH:BACKground:BYTE:C2A <NR1>
:SOURce:DATA:POH:BYTE
This command sets the value of a specific byte in the generated STS-1 #1 Path Overhead data. The byte
selection is specified by three numeric parameters: the first specifies the STS-1 number, the second
specifies the row number, and the third specifies the data. Because only STS-1 #1 may be selected, the
first parameter must be set to 1. The query form returns the current byte value.
Syntax: :SOURce<slot>:DATA:POH:BYTE? <NR1>
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:POH:BYTE <NR1> ,<NR1>
:SOURce:DATA:POH:BYTE:C2A
This command sets the value of the C2 byte in the generated STS-1 #1 Path Overhead data. The query
form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:POH:BYTE:C2A?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:POH:BYTE:C2A <NR1>
3-54
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:DATA:POH:DEFAult
This command sets all bytes in the generated STS-1 #1 Path Overhead data to their default values.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:POH:DEFAult
:SOURce:DATA:RATE
This query returns the output signal rate generated by the OTS transmitter.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:RATE?
Parameters
Description
G10A
10 Gb/s (OC-192 or STM-64)
:SOURce:DATA:SECTion:TRACe
This command sets the data sequence length and data byte values transmitted in the Section Trace (J0)
byte of the Transport Overhead. The data bytes are formatted as a standard IEEE-488 data block. The
query form returns the current settings.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:SECTion:TRACe?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:SECTion:TRACe <Enum> ,<Block>
Parameters
L1B
Description
Constant 8-bit data
L16B
L16FREE
L64B
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, 0-filled with CRC
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, arbitrary format
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, space-filled with CR/LF
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, arbitrary format
L64FREE
:SOURce:DATA:SECTion:TRACe:TYPE
This command sets the data sequence length transmitted in the Section Trace (J0) byte of the Transport
Overhead. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:SECTion:TRACe:TYPE?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:SECTion:TRACe:TYPE <Enum>
Parameters
L1B
Description
Constant 8-bit data
L16B
L16FREE
L64B
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, 0-filled with CRC
A repeating sequence of 16 bytes, arbitrary format
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, space-filled with CR/LF
A repeating sequence of 64 bytes, arbitrary format
L64FREE
OTS9100 User Manual
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:DATA:SECTion:TRACe:VALUe
This command sets the data byte values transmitted in the Section Trace (J0) byte of the Transport
Overhead. The data bytes are formatted as a standard IEEE-488 data block. The query form returns the
current values.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:SECTion:TRACe:VALUe?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:SECTion:TRACe:VALUe <Block>
:SOURce:DATA:SECTion:TRACe:VALUe:STRIng
This command sets the data byte values transmitted in the Section Trace (J0) byte of the Transport
Overhead. The data byte values are specified as an ASCII string. The query form returns the current
values.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:SECTion:TRACe:VALUe:STRIng?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:SECTion:TRACe:VALUe:STRIng <String>
:SOURce:DATA:SOURce
This command sets the source of the data at the output of the OTS-9000 transmitter. The query form
returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:SOURce?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:SOURce <Enum>
Parameters
Description
INTErnal
THRU
The payload data comes from the internal test pattern generator
Through mode: the transmitted data comes from the receiver
:SOURce:DATA:SPE:BACKground:STUFfing
This command controls the SPE fixed byte stuffing in non-active STS-1 channels. When enabled,
columns 30 and 59 of the background channels contain the fixed byte value zero and are not used for
payload. This command is applicable when the background channel structure is set to STS-1. When
disabled, columns 30 and 59 are part of the background payload. The query form returns the current
setting. <Slot> is an optional number that specifies the module slot containing the device that is the target
of the command; if omitted, it defaults to the lowest-numbered slot containing an applicable device.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:SPE:BACKground:STUFfing?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:SPE:BACKground:STUFfing <Boolean>
3-56
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:DATA:SPE:STUFfing
This command controls the SPE fixed byte stuffing. When enabled, columns 30 and 59 of the active
STS-1 channel contain the fixed byte value zero and are not used for payload. When disabled, columns
30 and 59 are part of the payload. This command is applicable when the active channel structure is set
to STS-1. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:SPE:STUFfing?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:SPE:STUFfing <Boolean>
:SOURce:DATA:STRUcture
This command sets the structure of the signal generated by the OTS-9000 transmitter. The query form
returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:STRUcture?
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:STRUcture <Enum>
Parameter
G10C
Description
Bulk data at 10Gb/s
G2P5C
M622C
M155C
M51A
Bulk data at 2.5 Gb/s
Bulk data at 622 Mb/s
Bulk data at 155 Mb/s
Bulk data at 51 Mb/s (SONET only)
:SOURce:DATA:TOH:STS1A:ALL
This command sets the values of all bytes in the generated STS-1 #1 Transport Overhead data. The
query form returns the current setting. There are 27 bytes in the data block. These correspond to the
overhead bytes A1, A2, J0, B1, E1*, F1*, D1*, D2*, D3*, H1..H3, B2, K1*, K2*, D4*..D12*, S1*, Z2*, E2*.
Only those bytes marked with * are settable; the values of the other bytes are automatically set by the
transmitter.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:TOH:STS1A:ALL? [<NR1>]
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:TOH:STS1A:ALL <NR1> ,<Block>
:SOURce:DATA:TOH:STS1A:BYTE
This command sets the value of a specific byte in the generated STS-1 #1 Transport Overhead data. The
byte selection is specified by three numeric parameters, for STS-1 number, row, and column; because
only STS-1 #1 may be selected, the first parameter must be set to 1. The query form returns the current
byte value.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:TOH:STS1A:BYTE? <NR1> ,<NR1> ,<NR1>
:SOURce<slot>:DATA:TOH:STS1A:BYTE <NR1> ,<NR1> ,<NR1> ,<NR1>
OTS9100 User Manual
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:DATA:TOH:STS1A:DEFAult
This command sets all bytes in the generated STS-1 #1 Transport Overhead data to their default values.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:DATA:TOH:STS1A:DEFAult
:SOURce:INSErt:ANOMaly:MODE
This command specifies how anomalies are inserted. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:INSErt:ANOMaly:MODE?
:SOURce<slot>:INSErt:ANOMaly:MODE <Enum>
Parameter
NONE
SINGle
BURSt
Description
Anomaly insertion is disabled
A single anomaly is inserted
A burst of anomalies is inserted
:SOURce:INSErt:ANOMaly:RATE
This command sets the rate at which continuously-generated anomalies are inserted. The query form
returns the current value.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:INSErt:ANOMaly:RATE?
:SOURce<slot>:INSErt:ANOMaly:RATE <NR3>
:SOURce:INSErt:ANOMaly:RATE:RANGe
This query returns the minimum and maximum rate values for the specified anomaly type.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:INSErt:ANOMaly:RATE:RANGe? <Enum>
Parameters
NONE
Description
No anomaly is selected
B1BIP
B1 parity errors
B2BIP
B2 parity errors
B3BIP
B3 parity errors
REI
Line REI errors
REI_P
Path REI errors
PATTern
RANDom
BIT_SPE
BIT_VC
Pattern bit errors
Errors in randomly-selected framing, overhead, and payload bits
Errors in randomly-selected SPE bits (SONET mode only)
Errors in randomly-selected VC bits (SDH mode only)
3-58
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:INSErt:ANOMaly:REPLicate:B2A
This command specifies whether a generated B2 error is replicated into all the B2 bytes of the frame (ON)
or appears only in the first byte (OFF). The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:INSErt:ANOMaly:REPLicate:B2A?
:SOURce<slot>:INSErt:ANOMaly:REPLicate:B2A <Boolean>
:SOURce:INSErt:ANOMaly:STATe
This query returns the current state of anomaly insertion.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:INSErt:ANOMaly:STATe?
Parameters
INACT
Description
Defect/anomaly insertion is inactive
SING_INACT
SING_DWELL
BRST_INACT
BRST_ACT
BRST_DWELL
CONT_INACT
CONT_ACT
CONT_DWELL
One-time defect/anomaly insertion is inactive
One-time defect/anomaly insertion is active
Burst defect/anomaly insertion is inactive
Burst defect/anomaly insertion is active, between bursts
Burst defect/anomaly insertion is active
Continuous defect/anomaly insertion is inactive
Continuous defect/anomaly insertion is inactive
Continuous defect/anomaly insertion is active
:SOURce:INSErt:ANOMaly:TYPE
This command selects the type of anomaly inserted. The query form returns the current selection.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:INSErt:ANOMaly:TYPE?
:SOURce<slot>:INSErt:ANOMaly:TYPE <Enum>
Parameters
NONE
Description
No anomaly is selected
B1BIP
B1 parity errors
B2BIP
B2 parity errors
B3BIP
B3 parity errors
REI
Line REI errors
REI_P
Path REI errors
PATTern
RANDom
BIT_SPE
BIT_VC
Pattern bit errors
Errors in randomly-selected framing, overhead, and payload bits
Errors in randomly-selected SPE bits (SONET mode only)
Errors in randomly-selected VC bit (SDH mode only)
OTS9100 User Manual
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:INSErt:DEFEct:MODE
This command specifies how defects are inserted. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:INSErt:DEFEct:MODE?
:SOURce<slot>:INSErt:DEFEct:MODE <Enum>
Parameters
NONE
Description
Defect insertion is disabled
BURSt
A defect condition is asserted for a programmed time
CONTinuous A defect condition is asserted continously
:SOURce:INSErt:DEFEct:STATe
This query returns the current state of defect insertion.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:INSErt:DEFEct:STATe?
Parameters
INACT
Description
Defect/anomaly insertion is inactive
SING_INACT
SING_DWELL
BRST_INACT
BRST_ACT
BRST_DWELL
CONT_INACT
CONT_ACT
CONT_DWELL
One-time defect/anomaly insertion is inactive
One-time defect/anomaly insertion is active
Burst defect/anomaly insertion is inactive
Burst defect/anomaly insertion is active, between bursts
Burst defect/anomaly insertion is active
Continuous defect/anomaly insertion is inactive
Continuous defect/anomaly insertion is inactive
Continuous defect/anomaly insertion is active
:SOURce:INSErt:DEFEct:TIME
This command sets the duration of timed defect insertion in the units appropriate to the selected defect.
The query form returns the current value.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:INSErt:DEFEct:TIME?
:SOURce<slot>:INSErt:DEFEct:TIME <NR1>
3-60
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:INSErt:DEFEct:TIME:RANGe
This query returns a units keyword and two integer numbers representing the minimum and maximum
duration values for timed defects. The units keyword is one of FRAME, US, MS, S, SEC10 (0.1S), and
SEC100 (0.01S).
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:INSErt:DEFEct:TIME:RANGe? <Enum>
Parameter
NONE
LOS
LOF
AIS_L
Description
No defect is selected
Loss of signal
Loss of frame
Line AIS
RDI_L
Line RDI
AIS_P
Path AIS
RDI_P
Path RDI
RDIPAY_P
RDISRV_P
RDICON_P
LOP_P
Path RDI (Payload)
Path RDI (Server)
Path RDI (Connectivity)
Path loss of pointer
:SOURce:INSErt:DEFEct:TYPE
This command selects the type of defect inserted. The query form returns the current selection.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:INSErt:DEFEct:TYPE?
:SOURce<slot>:INSErt:DEFEct:TYPE <Enum>
Parameters
NONE
LOS
LOF
AIS_L
Description
No defect is selected
Loss of signal
Loss of frame
Line AIS
RDI_L
Line RDI
AIS_P
Path AIS
RDI_P
Pat RDI
RDIPAY_P
RDISRV_P
RDICON_P
LOP_P
Path RDI (Payload)
Path RDI (Server)
Path RDI (Connectivity)
Path loss of pointer
:SOURce:INSert:IP:ANOMaly:MODE
This command specifies how IP anomalies are inserted. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:INSert:IP:ANOMaly:MODE?
:SOURce<slot>:INSert:IP:ANOMaly:MODE <Parameter>
Parameters
NONE
SINGle
Description
IP anomaly insertion is disabled
A single IP anomaly is inserted
CONTinuous IP anomalies are inserted continuously, at the programmed rate
OTS9100 User Manual
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:INSert:IP:ANOMaly:RATE
This command sets the rate at which continuously generated IP anomalies are inserted. The query form
returns the current value.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:INSert:IP:ANOMaly:RATE?
:SOURce<slot>:INSert:IP:ANOMaly:RATE <NR3>
:SOURce:INSert:IP:ANOMaly:RATE:RANGe
This query returns the minimum and maximum rate values for the specified IP anomaly type. The values
returned are formatted as NR3 parameters.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:INSert:IP:ANOMaly:RATE:RANGe? <Parameter>
Parameters
NONE
FCS
PAYLoad
CRC
Description
No anomaly is selected
HDLC frame check sequence errors
IP payload errors
IP header check sum errors
:SOURce:INSert:IP:ANOMaly:TYPE
This command selects the type of IP anomaly inserted. The query form returns the current selection.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:INSert:IP:ANOMaly:TYPE?
:SOURce<slot>:INSert:IP:ANOMaly:TYPE <Parameter>
Parameters
NONE
FCS
PAYLoad
CRC
Description
No anomaly is selected
HDLC frame check sequence errors
IP payload errors
IP header check sum errors
:SOURce:MEASure:HDLC:BYTes
This query returns the number of HDLC bytes transmitted with good FCS.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:MEASure:HDLC:BYTes?
3-62
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:MEASure:HDLC:FRAMes
This query returns the value of the specified result parameter.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:MEASure:HDLC:FRAMes? <Parameter>
Parameters
GPCS
BFCS
Description
Count of HDLC frames transmitted with good FCS
Count of HDLC frames transmitted with bad FCS
:SOURce:MEASure:HDLC:FRAMes:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the :SOURce:MEASure:HDLC:FRAMes?
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:MEASure:HDLC:FRAMes:ALL?
:SOURce:MEASure:IP:PACKets
This query returns the value of the specified result parameter.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:MEASure:IP:PACKets? <Parameter>
Parameters
TOTal
GOOD
BAD
Description
Total count of transmitted IP packets
Count of good transmitted IP packets
Count of IP packets transmitted without errors
:SOURce:MEASure:IP:PACKets:ALL
This query returns the values of all of the parameters of the :SOURce:MEASure:IP:PACKets?
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:MEASure:IP:PACKets:ALL?
:SOURce:OUTPut:LASER
This command enables or disables the Transmitter's output laser. The query returns the current setting.
The laser, when turned on, takes some time to reach operating conditions; during this time, the query
returns INITIALIZING.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:OUTPut:LASER?
:SOURce<slot>:OUTPut:LASER <Enum>
Parameters
OFF
Description
Set laser off
ON
Set laser on
INITializing
The laser is initializing (query response only)
OTS9100 User Manual
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:OUTPut:LASer:INFO:OPTion
This command queries the value of the device option code.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:OUTPut:LASer:INFO:OPTion?
:SOURce:OUTPut:LASer:INFO:SERial
This command queries the value of the laser serial number.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:OUTPut:LASer:INFO:SERial?
:SOURce:OUTPut:LASer:INFO:WAVelength
This command queries the value of the Laser Wavelength setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:OUTPut:LASer:INFO:WAVelength?
:SOURce:OUTPut:LASER:INTERlock
This query returns the state of the interlock key switch on the OTS interface module connected to the
selected transmitter. The key must be on for the laser to operate.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:OUTPut:LASER:INTERlock?
:SOURce:SIGNal:STANdard
This command sets individual OTS9100 modules to the SONET or SDH signal mode. The query form
returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce <Slot>:SIGNal:STANdard?
:SOURce <Slot>:SIGNal:STANdard SONET SDH
Parameters
SONET
SDH
Description
Set module to SONET signal mode
Set module to SDH signal mode
Set module to BERT
BERT
3-64
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SOURce:TRIGger:MODE
This command sets the condition that will produce a trigger output from the OTS-9000 transmitter. The
query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SOURce<slot>:TRIGger:MODE?
:SOURce<slot>:TRIGger:MODE <Enum>
Parameters
OFF
Description
The trigger output is disabled
ANOMaly
DEFEct
AD
A trigger occurs when an anomaly is generated
A trigger occurs when a defect is generated
A trigger occurs when an anomaly or defect is generated
:STATus:PRESet
This command initializes the Interface Status subsystem to a defined initial state.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:PRIMary?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:PRIMary <Enum> |<NR1>
Parameters
Description
NONE
The GPIB port is disabled
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:PRIMary
This command sets the primary address for the GPIB remote control port. A value of NONE disables the
GPIB port. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:PRIMary?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:PRIMary <Enum> |<NR1>
Parameters
Description
NONE
The GPIB port is disabled
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:SECOndary
This command sets the secondary address for the GPIB port. A value of NONE disables secondary
addressing. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:SECOndary?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:SECOndary <Enum> |<NR1>
Parameters
Description
NONE
Secondary GPIB addressing is disabled
OTS9100 User Manual
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:ECHO
This command sets the initial value of the echo control variable for new network connections. This setting
has no effect on connections already established (see :SYSTEM:COMMUNICATE:PORT:ECHO). The
query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:ECHO?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:ECHO <NR1>
Bit value Function
0
1
2
4
Disables echo
Enables echo
Causes the input terminator character to be echoed as CR-LF
Enables input line buffering: received characters are not processed until the
terminating CR or LF
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPPORT
This command sets the IP port address on which the system listens for new connections. Changing the
setting has no effect on connections already established. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPPORT?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPPORT <NR1>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:PROMpt
This command sets the initial state of the user prompt on new network connections. This setting has no
effect on connections already established (see :SYSTEM:COMMUNICATE:PORT:PROMPT). The query
form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:PROMpt?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:PROMpt <Boolean>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RXTERM
This command sets the initial selection, for new network connections, of the character recognized as End-
of-Input. This setting has no effect on connections already established (see
:SYSTEM:COMMUNICATE:PORT:RXTERM). The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RXTERM?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RXTERM <Enum>
Parameters
Description
LF
CR
Line feed (LF) character, 0x0A; an optional preceding CR is ignored
Carriage return (CR) character, 0x0D; an optional preceding LF is ignored
3-66
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:TXTERM
This command sets the initial selection, for new network connections, of the characters sent at the end of
a query response. This setting has no effect on connections already established (see
:SYSTEM:COMMUNICATE:PORT:TXTERM). The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:TXTERM?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:TXTERM <Enum>
Parameters
LF
CR
CRLF
LFCR
Description
Line feed (LF) character, 0x0A
Carriage return (CR) character, 0x0D
CR followed by LF
LF followed by CR
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:PORT:ECHO
The PORT commands affect the character-based remote control port (serial port or network connection)
that receives the command; they are not valid for the GPIB. This command controls, for the current
remote-control port, how the system echoes the characters it receives. The parameter is a numeric value
containing three individual control bits. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:PORT:ECHO?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:PORT:ECHO <NR1>
Bit value Function
0
1
2
4
Disables echo
Enables echo
Causes the input terminator character to be echoed as CR-LF
Enables input line buffering: received characters are not processed until the
terminating CR or LF
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:PORT:PROMpt
This command enables or disables the user prompt on the current remote-control port. When the prompt
is enabled, the system prompts when it is ready for a command. The query form returns the current
setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:PORT:PROMpt?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:PORT:PROMpt <Boolean>
OTS9100 User Manual
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:PORT:RXTERM
This command selects, for the current remote-control port, the character the OTS system recognizes as
End-of-Input. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:PORT:RXTERM?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:PORT:RXTERM <Enum>
Parameters
Description
LF
CR
Line feed (LF) character, 0x0A; an optional preceding CR is ignored
Carriage return (CR) character, 0x0D; an optional preceding LF is ignored
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:PORT:TXTERM
This command controls, for the current remote-control port, the characters the OTS system sends at the
end of a query response. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:PORT:TXTERM?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:PORT:TXTERM <Enum>
Parameters
LF
CR
CRLF
LFCR
Description
Line feed (LF) character, 0x0A
Carriage return (CR) character, 0x0D
CR followed by LF
LF followed by CR
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:DTR
This command controls the state of the DTR (Data Terminal Ready) control signal on the COM1 port. The
query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:DTR?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:DTR <Boolean>
3-68
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:ECHO
This command controls, for the COM1 serial port, how the system echoes the characters it receives. The
parameter is a numeric value containing three individual control bits. The query form returns the current
setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:ECHO?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:ECHO <NR1>
Bit value Function
0
1
2
4
Disables echo
Enables echo
Causes the input terminator character to be echoed as CR-LF
Enables input line buffering: received characters are not processed until the
terminating CR or LF
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:ENABle
This command enables or disables the operation of serial port COM1 as a remote control port. The query
form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:ENABle?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:ENABle <Boolean>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:FLOW
This command sets the type of flow control used for serial communications on the COM1 serial port.
When flow control is enabled, the receiver signals the sender when its buffer is full, so as not to lose
characters. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:FLOW?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:FLOW <Enum>
Parameters
NONE
Description
No flow control is enabled
HARDware
SOFTware
Flow control uses RS-232 control signals
Flow control uses XON and XOFF characters in the data stream
OTS9100 User Manual
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:NDATA
This command sets the number of data bits per character on the COM1 serial port. The query form
returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:NDATA?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:NDATA <Enum>
Parameters
N7A
N8A
Description
Seven-bit data
Eight-bit data
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:NSTOP
This command sets the number of stop bits per character on the COM1 serial port. The query form
returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:NSTOP?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:NSTOP <Enum>
Parameters
N1A
Description
One stop bit
N1P5A
N2
One and one-half stop bits
Two stop bits
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:PARIty
This command sets, for the COM1 serial port, the function of the high-order (eighth) bit in each serial. The
query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:PARIty?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:PARIty <Enum>
Parameters
NONE
Description
No parity
ODD
Odd parity
EVEN
Even parity
MARK
SPACE
The parity bit is always set
The parity bit is always clear
3-70
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:PROMpt
This command enables or disables the user prompt on the COM1 serial port. When the prompt is
enabled, the system prompts when it is ready for a command. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:PROMpt?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:PROMpt <Boolean>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:RATE
This command sets the baud rate for the COM1 serial port. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:RATE?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:RATE <Enum>
Parameters
R1200B
R2400B
R4800B
R9600B
R19KB
R38KB
R57KB
R115KB
Description
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
9600 baud
19.2K baud
38.4K baud
57.6K baud
115.2K baud
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:RTS
This command controls the state of the RTS (Request to Send) control signal on the COM1 port. It has no
effect when hardware flow control is enabled. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:RTS?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:RTS <Boolean>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:RXTERM
This command selects, for the COM1 serial port, the character the OTS-9000 system recognizes as End-
of-Input. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:RXTERM?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:RXTERM <Enum>
Parameters
Description
LF
CR
Line feed (LF) character, 0x0A; an optional preceding CR is ignored
Carriage return (CR) character, 0x0D; an optional preceding LF is ignored
OTS9100 User Manual
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:TXTERM
This command controls, for the COM1 serial port, the characters the OTS system sends at the end of a
query response. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:TXTERM?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM1A:TXTERM <Enum>
Parameters
LF
CR
CRLF
LFCR
Description
Line feed (LF) character, 0x0A
Carriage return (CR) character, 0x0D
CR followed by LF
LF followed by CR
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:DTR
This command controls the state of the DTR (Data Terminal Ready) control signal on the COM2 port.
The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:DTR?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:DTR <Boolean>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:ECHO
This command controls, for the COM2 serial port, how the system echoes the characters it receives. The
parameter is a numeric value containing three individual control bits. The query form returns the current
setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:ECHO?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:ECHO <NR1>
Bit value Function
0
1
2
4
Disables (0) echo
Enables (1) echo
Causes the input terminator character to be echoed as CR-LF
Enables input line buffering: received characters are not processed until the terminating
CR or LF
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:ENABle
This command enables or disables the operation of serial port COM2 as a remote control port. The query
form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:ENABle?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:ENABle <Boolean>
3-72
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:FLOW
This command sets the type of flow control used for serial communications on the COM2 serial port.
When flow control is enabled, the receiver signals the sender when its buffer is full, so as not to lose
characters. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:FLOW?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:FLOW <Enum>
Parameter
NONE
Description
No flow control is enabled
HARDware
SOFTware
Flow control uses RS-232 control signals
Flow control uses XON and XOFF characters in the data stream
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:NDATA
This command sets the number of data bits per character on the COM2 serial port. The query form
returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:NDATA?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:NDATA <Enum>
Parameters
N7A
N8A
Description
Seven-bit data
Eight-bit data
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:NSTOP
This command sets the number of stop bits per character on the COM2 serial port. The query form
returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:NSTOP?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:NSTOP <Enum>
Parameters
N1A
Description
One stop bit
N1P5A
N2
One and one-half stop bits
Two stop bits
OTS9100 User Manual
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:PARIty
This command sets, for the COM2 serial port, the function of the high-order (eighth) bit in each serial. The
query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:PARIty?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:PARIty <Enum>
Parameter
NONE
ODD
Description
No parity
Odd parity
EVEN
Even parity
MARK
SPACE
The parity bit is always set
The parity bit is always clear
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:PROMpt
This command enables or disables the user prompt on the COM2 serial port. When the prompt is
enabled, the system prompts when it is ready for a command. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:PROMpt?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:PROMpt <Boolean>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:RATE
This command sets the baud rate for the COM2 serial port. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:RATE?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:RATE <Enum>
Parameters
R1200B
R2400B
R4800B
R9600B
R19KB
R38KB
R57KB
R115KB
Description
1200 baud
2400 baud
4800 baud
9600 baud
19.2K baud
38.4K baud
57.6K baud
115.2K baud
3-74
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:RTS
This command controls the state of the RTS (Request to Send) control signal on the COM2 port. It has no
effect when hardware flow control is enabled. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:RTS?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:RTS <Boolean>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:RXTERM
This command selects, for the COM2 serial port, the character the OTS-9000 system recognizes as End-
of-Input. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:RXTERM?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:RXTERM <Enum>
Parameters
Description
LF
CR
Line feed (LF) character, 0x0A; an optional preceding CR is ignored
Carriage return (CR) character, 0x0D; an optional preceding LF is ignored
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:TXTERM
This command controls, for the COM2 serial port, the characters the OTS-9000 system sends at the end
of a query response. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:TXTERM?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERIal:COM2A:TXTERM <Enum>
Parameters
LF
CR
CRLF
LFCR
Description
Line feed (LF) character, 0x0A
Carriage return (CR) character, 0x0D
CR followed by LF
LF followed by CR
:SYSTem:CONFig:MODule:SERIAL
This query accepts a module slot number, between 1 and 16, and returns a string identifying the
Tektronix module card serial number as a quoted string.
Syntax :SYSTem:CONFig:MODule:SERIAL? <NR1>
OTS9100 User Manual
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:CONFig:MODule:TYPE
This query accepts a module slot number, between 1 and 16, and returns a string identifying the
Tektronix module in the specified slot. If the slot specified does not contain an OTS system, this query
returns the string 'Non-Tek device or empty slot'.
Syntax :SYSTem:CONFig:MODule:TYPE? <NR1>
:SYSTem:CONFig:MODule:VARIANT
This query accepts a module slot number, between 1 and 16, and returns the module variant as a
decimal number, or 0 if there is no variant information. "Variant" is the module sub-type, for example, the
Optics card may be a Transceiver, Transmit only, or Receive only version
Syntax :SYSTem:CONFig:MODule:VARIANT? <NR1>
:SYSTem:CONFig:MODule:VERSion
This query accepts a module slot number, between 1 and 16, and returns the version information
associated with the Tektronix module in the specified slot. The string returned has the format
Mnn.nn,Unn.nn,Dnn.nn,Xnn.nn,Fnn.nn and contains major and minor version numbers for the module
itself and its utility, driver, FPGA file, and firmware. Fields that are not applicable to the particular module
are returned as 0. If the specified slot does not contain an OTS system, this query returns an error.
Syntax :SYSTem:CONFig:MODule:VERSion? <NR1>
:SYSTem:CONFig:SLOTs
This query returns the number of module slots in the system.
Syntax :SYSTem:CONFig:SLOTs?
:SYSTem:DESCription:SETUp
This command sets a text string that is stored with the current system settings and which may be used to
annotate or identify the instrument setup. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:DESCription:SETUp?
:SYSTem:DESCription:SETUp <String>
3-76
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:ERRor
This query returns the next event in the Error and Event Queue. The *ESR? query must be given before
events occuring since the last *ESR? query can be read.
Syntax :SYSTem:ERRor?
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:AGE
This command sets the maximum age of a file, a delta of file creation time and current system time. Files
at this age or older are deleted on the next revisit, as set by INTErval. This command takes three comma
separated parameters: Days,Hrs,Mins. The query form returns the current setting in the same form.
Syntax: :SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:AGE?
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:AGE <NR1> ,<NR1> ,<NR1>
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:COUNt
This command sets the maximum number of result files allowed before deletion begins. The order in
which files are deleted is based on the sort criteria, see the SORT command below. The query form
returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:COUNt?
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:COUNt <NR1>
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:DESTination
This command defines the path to the files to be deleted. This command requires the full path including
drive letter. The query form returns the current directory path marked for deletion.
Syntax: :SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:DESTination?
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:DESTination <String>
OTS9100 User Manual
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:ENABle
This command enables or disables each individual deletion trigger. During the current revisit interval the
enable flags are polled, if an enabled criteria is met file deletion will begin and continue until all enabled
criteria have been satisfied. Disabling the revisit interval flag will keep the system from deleting any files,
while maintaining user-selected criteria. NOTE: The system requires a single numeric (base 10)
parameter, flags are described as a bit field, the user must convert from the bit field (or hex) to a numeric
integer. Flags are cumulative. Sending the value of zero disables all criteria.
Syntax: :SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:ENABle?
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:ENABle <NR1>
Bit Value Criteria affected
0x1
0x2
0x4
0x8
0x10
Enables (1) or disables (0) deletion based on number of files. Set by the COUNt
command.
Enables (1) or disables (0) deletion based on total consumed space of files. Set by the
TOTAlsize command.
Enables (1) or disables (0) deletion based on percentage of volume consumed. Set by the
PERcent command.
Enables (1) or disables (0) deletion based on age of files (delta). Set by the AGE
command.
Enables (1) or disables (0) the revisit interval. Set by the INTErval command.
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:INTErval
This command sets the minimum amount of time the system waits between polling file deletion criteria. If
any deletion criteria have been met, such as number of files, deletion will begin. If no criteria are met no
deletion will take place until the next interval. The query form returns the current setting. NOTE: Units for
INTErval are usec. Settings of less than 30000usec (30sec) should be avoided since constant revisits
consume system resources. It is important to understand that this is a requested minimum interval, actual
intervals are based on free CPU cycles.
Syntax: :SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:INTErval?
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:INTErval <NR1>
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:PERcent
This command sets the maximum percentage of disk volume that files are allowed to consume before
deletion begins. The order in which files are deleted is based on the sort criteria, see the SORT command
below. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax: :SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:PERcent?
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:PERcent <NR1>
3-78
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:SORT
This command defines the sorting method by which files are prioritized for deletion. The system default is
by a file's creation time. The query form returns the current sorting method.
Syntax: :SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:SORT?
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:SORT <Enum>
Parameters
CREAted
MODified
Description
Sort by creation time
Sort by last modified time
Sort by last accessed time
ACCEssed
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:TOTAlsize
This command sets the maximum amount of space combined files are allowed to span before deletion is
initiated. The order in which files are deleted is based on the sort criteria, see the SORT command below.
The query form returns the current setting. NOTE: Units for TOTAlsize are in megabytes.
Syntax: :SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:TOTAlsize?
:SYSTem:FILEs:MGMT:RESUlts:TOTAlsize <NR1>
:SYSTem:FORMat:BLOCk
This command selects whether binary block data command parameters are transmitted as raw 8-bit
binary characters or pairs of hex digits. Some communication links may not be able to send raw binary
data. The query form returns the current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:FORMat:BLOCk?
:SYSTem:FORMat:BLOCk <Enum>
Parameters
BINary
HEX
Description
Block data uses raw 8-bit binary bytes
Block data uses two hex digits per byte
:SYSTem:HEADers
This command enables or disables command headers in query responses. When headers are enabled,
the response to a query is in the form of a complete command sufficient to set the present value. When
headers are disabled, the query returns only the present value. The query form returns the current
setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:HEADers?
:SYSTem:HEADers <Boolean>
OTS9100 User Manual
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:LOCK:RELease
This command releases the lock set by a :SYSTEM:LOCK:REQUEST operation. The lock must have
been set by the same user; an attempt to release a lock set by another user will not succeed. If no lock is
set this command is ignored.
Syntax :SYSTem:LOCK:RELease
:SYSTem:LOCK:RELease:FORCE
This command releases any lock set by a :SYSTEM:LOCK:REQUEST operation or any corresponding
user-interface operation.
Syntax :SYSTem:LOCK:RELease:FORCE
:SYSTem:LOCK:REQuest
This query attempts to lock' the system interface, ie, to take exclusive control of the system for commands
that change system settings ('set' commands). It returns 1 if the lock succeeds, 0 if it fails.
Syntax :SYSTem:LOCK:REQuest?
:SYSTem:SIGNal:STANdard
This command sets the OTS9100 system to the SONET or SDH signal mode. The query form returns the
current setting.
Syntax :SYSTem:STANdard?
:SYSTem:STANdard SONET SDH
Parameters
SONET
SDH
Description
Set system to SONET signal mode
Set system to SDH signal mode
3-80
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
:SYSTem:VERBose
This command selects short- or long-form command headers in query responses. The query form returns
the current setting. Long-form responses are composed of the full header keywords; short-form
responses use the abbreviated keywords.
Syntax :SYSTem:VERBose?
:SYSTem:VERBose <Boolean>
*TST
This query returns a Boolean value representing self-test results.
Syntax *TST?
OTS9100 User Manual
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference: Remote Commands ~ Command Description
3-82
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
This section begins with a brief description of the OTS9100 module. Following the description,
the section contains a complete listing of the instrument specification.
The organization of this section is as follows:
•
•
•
•
System Specifications
Transmitter (Tx) Specifications
Receiver (Rx) Specifications
Certifications and Compliance
Environmental Specifications
Temperature Ranges
Operating Temperature: -0° to +35°Celsius
Non-Operating Temperature: -20° to +60°Celsius
Humidity Ranges
Operating Humidity: 0 to +30°Celsius with relative humidity ≤ 80% non-condensing and up to
+35 °C with a relative humidity ≤ 60% non-condensing.
Non-Operating Humidity: 0 to +30°Celsius with relative humidity ≤ 90% non-condensing and
up to +60 °C with a relative humidity ≤ 25% non-condensing.
Dimensions
The dimensions of all module cards are 6u (233.35 mm x 160 mm, 9.19 inches x 6.3 inches) form
factor with 4hp (20.32 mm, 0.8 inches) front panel.
Weight
Clock Trig module card:
Transmit module card:
Receiver module card:
Optics module card:
0.75 lb
1.0 lb
1.0 lb
1.75 lbs
OTS9100 User Manual
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Transmitter Specifications
Clock Source
Internally generated clock:
9953.28 MHz +/- 4.6ppm
Thru mode clock:
Derived from clock recovered from received signal
155.52MHz +/- 100ppm
External Clock:
Signal Generation
Internal Mode
This mode requires no external test equipment to generate a valid 9.95238 Gb/s output.
ꢀ Data: 9.95238 Gb/s output with PN7 scrambled NRZ format; in BERT mode, unframed and
unscrambled PRBS data
Table A-1: SONET Default Overhead
A1 and A2 are set to (hexadecimal) F6H and 28H, respectively.
Section
The J0 byte is set to the 16-byte string “Tektronix/BTT”. The first byte of this
string is the CRC.
B1 contains computed BIP-8.
191 Z0 bytes are set to 0xCC.
All other Section OverHead (SOH) set to 00H.
For each channel, the first H1 is set to 62H and the first H2 is set to 0AH.
Line
For concatenated structures, subsequent H1’s are set to 93H and H2’s are set to
FFH filling the remaining pointer values for the structure before repeating first
H1, H2.
H3’s are all set to 00H.
B2 contains (192) computed BIP-8.
All other Line OverHead (LOH) set to 00H.
B3 contains computed BIP-8
Path
The J1 byte is set to the 16-byte string “Tektronix/BTT”. The first byte of this
string is the CRC.
All other Path OverHead (POH) set to 00H.
A-2
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table A-2: SDH Default Overhead
A1 and A2 are set to (hexadecimal) F6H and 28H, respectively.
Regenerator
Section
The J0 byte is set to the 16-byte string “Tektronix/BTT”. The first byte of this
string is the CRC.
B1 contains computed BIP-8.
All other Section OverHead (SOH) set to 00H.
For each channel, the first H1 is set to 6AH and the first H2 is set to 0AH.
Multiplexer
Section
For concatenated structures, subsequent H1’s are set to 93H and H2’s are set to
FFH filling the remaining pointer values for the structure before repeating first
H1, H2.
H3’s are all set to 00H.
B2 contains (192) computed BIP-8. B2 contains computed BIP-Nx24.
All other Line OverHead (LOH) set to 00H.
B3 contains computed BIP-8.
Path
The J1 byte is set to the 16-byte string “Tektronix/BTT”. The first byte of this
string is the CRC.
All other Path OverHead (POH) set to 00H.
Through Mode
ꢀ BERT mode: Generates an unframed and unscrambled PRBS data pattern. Fixed data
patterns of all ones, all zeros, or user byte are not allowed in this mode. Random Bit Errors
can be inserted. No other settings or controls, for example structure, overhead, and
anomalies, apply in this mode.
ꢀ Non-intrusive mode: External 10 Gb/s data signal is passed through the module without
modification.
ꢀ Intrusive mode (Active Through Mode): Allows overhead bytes to be overwritten while
regenerating the received 10 Gb/s signal. Alarms and errors can also be added to the
received signal prior to retransmission. Several Overhead bytes in the first STS-3c (or first 3
STS-1’s) (SONET) or AU-4 (SDH) may be independently set as hexadecimal values in the
range of 00 to FF. The A1, A2, B1, B2, and H1-H3 bytes may not be overwritten. The
settable bytes include J0, E1, F1, D1-D3, K1, K2, D4-D12, S1, and E2. Clear-text coding
and dedicated menus for S1 (Synchronization Status Byte) and K1/K2 (MSP-Multiplex
Section Protection/ APS – Automatic Protection Switching) bytes may also be overwritten.
The B1/B2/B3 bytes may be recalculated.
NOTE: M1 may not be explicitly edited but the overwrite control must be set to allow REI-L
anomalies to be inserted in through mode.
The path overhead may also be overwritten. B3 may be recalculated. J1, C2, F2, H4, Z3/F3,
Z4/K3, and Z5/N1 are the path overhead bytes available for overwriting. The payload can be
replaced with an internally generated payload by selecting the “Overwrite Payload” control.
OTS9100 User Manual
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
NOTE: In intrusive through mode, any defect applied has immediate effect. Certain anomalies
have no effect unless overwrite is turned on for the anomaly byte. This applies to B1 BIP (B1), B2
BIP (B2), REI-L (M1), B3 BIP (B3), and REI-P (G1). Random Bit, Random SPE Bit, and payload
bit may always be applied.
NOTE: G1 may not be explicitly edited but the overwrite control must be set to allow REI-P
anomalies to be inserted in through mode.
Internal Payload Structures
In SONET mode, the signal can be multiplexed as (192) STS-1, (64) STS-3c, (16) STS-12c, (4)
STS-48c, or (1) STS-192c.
In SDH mode, the signal can be multiplexed as (192) VC-3, (64) VC-4, (16) VC-4-4c, (4) VC-4-
16c, or (1) VC-4-64c.
For STS-1 and VC-3, the stuff columns may be set to 0 or filled with payload. In SPE/VC3 Bulk
mode, columns 30 and 59 will be filled with payload. In SPE/VC3 Stuff mode, columns 30 and
59 will be filled with zero byte.
Active Channel
The active channel affects which payload is affected by the active controls, including the POH
edit. The active channel range is dependent upon the structure and is so limited. The user may
control the structure, the SPE/VC3 Stuff column control, and the test pattern for each active
channel.
Background Channel
The user may control structure, SPE/VC3 Stuff column control, and test pattern.
NOTE: The background structure can never be ST-192c or VC-4-64c as that would take up the
entire signal.
Test Patterns
The test patterns available include PN15, PN15 Inverted, PN23, PN23 Inverted (ITU-T 0.181),
PN31, PN31 Inverted, All zeros, All ones, Fixed 8-bit Data (user-editable).
A-4
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Overhead Manipulation Specifications
Subsequent to the default values, the following overhead modifications are possible:
The following bytes can be individually selected and edited:
J0, J1, E1, F1, F2, D1-D3, G1, H4, K1, K2, D4-D12, S1, M1, E2, Z0, Z3, Z4, Z5
C2 of the active POH (all other C2 bytes can be set to a user-selectable 8-bit value)
Z0 bytes 2 through 192 may be edited to a fixed byte value, set to the column number
(ITU G. 783), set to 0xCC (GR-253), or set to a series of Consecutive Identical Digits (CID).
J0 editing: Single byte, 16-byte sequence (ITU-T), 64-byte sequence (SONET)
J1 editing: Single byte, 16-byte sequence (ITU-T), 64-byte sequence (SONET)
Some bytes can be altered through alarm and error generation as follows:
1. Generating errored frames will invert all 192 A1 and A2 bits.
2. Generating RDI-L (MS-RDI) will force least significant 3 bits of K2 to 110.
3. Generating AIS-L (MS-AIS) will force least significant 3 bits of K2 to 111. AIS-L is a
signal with valid section overhead and a scrambled all ones pattern for the line overhead and
payload.
4. B1 error injection inverts one or more bits in one or more B1 bytes.
5. B2 error injection inverts one or more bits in one or more B2 bytes.
6. B3 error injection inverts one or more bits in one or more B3 bytes.
7. REI-L (MS-REI) error injection sets M1 byte to indicate one or more errors.
8. REI-P (HP-REI) error injection sets the four most significant bits of the G1 byte to indicate
one or more errors.
9. LOP error injection sets the H1/H2 pointer bytes to 63/0F for SONET and 6B/0F for SDH.
This equates to a pointer value of 783, which is over the maximum allowable pointer value
of 782.
10. AIS-P (HP-AIS) forces all ones into the H1/H2/H3 bytes and the entire SPE.
11. RDI-P (HP-RDI) has four different defect types. The RDI-P defect forces the G1 byte bits 4-
1 to the following values:
ꢁ “one bit” RDI-P: ‘100’
ꢁ Enhanced RDI-P Payload: ‘010’
ꢁ Enhanced RDI-P Server: ‘101’
ꢁ Enhanced RDI-P Connectivity: ‘110’
The rest of the POH in the active channel can be set to the user-selected values.
Error Injection
Error Rates: All error rates can be selected in the form X.Y e-Z. See Table A-3 for maximum
and minimum error rates.
Random Errors: Errors are distributed across the entire 10Gb/s signal; includes overhead and
payload.
Random SPE Errors: Errors are distributed across the SPE only (Path and payload).
B1, B2, or B3 single error or error rate is generated by inverting a random bit in the byte.
MS REI/ REI-L: The OC-192 M1 byte is overwritten to convey the error count.
OTS9100 User Manual
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table A-3: Error Rate Max/Min
Error Type
Maximum Rate
6.430 x 10-6
6.502 x 10-6
2.66 x 10-5
2.072 x 10-4
3.906 x 10-3
3.906 x 10-3
2.66 x 10-5
Minimum Rate
1 x 10-14
1 x 10-14
1 x 10-14
1 x 10-14
1 x 10-14
1 x 10-14
1 x 10-14
1 x 10-14
B1
B2
B3
REI-L (MS-REI)
Payload Bit
Random Bit
REI-P (HP-REI)
Random Bit (SPE only)
(Random VC Bit)
3.906 x 10-3
Defect/ Alarm Generation
LOS: 9.95238 Gb/s output is forced to all zeros for a user selected time, from 1 to 15
microseconds with a resolution of 1 microsecond or continuously.
LOF, SEF: All of the A1 and A2 bytes of the 9.95238 Gb/s output are inverted for a user-selected
time.
AIS-L (MS-AIS): The Line OH (Multiplex Section OH) and the entire SPE are set to all ones for
a user-selected time.
RDI-L (MS-RDI): The '110' code is set in the three least significant bits of the K2 byte for a user-
selected time.
LOP (HP-LOP) sets the H1/H2 pointer bytes to 63/0F for SONET and 6B/0F for SDH. This
equates to a pointer value of 783, which is over the maximum allowable pointer value of 782.
AIS-P (HP-AIS) forces all ones into the H1/H2/H3 bytes and the entire SPE.
RDI-P (HP-RDI) has four different defect types. The RDI-P defect forces the G1 byte bits 4-1 to
the following values:
ꢁ “one bit” RDI-P: ‘100’
ꢁ Enhanced RDI-P Payload: ‘010’
ꢁ Enhanced RDI-P Server: ‘101’
ꢁ Enhanced RDI-P Connectivity: ‘110’
For all Defects except LOS, the time is selected in frames, up to 240000, or continuous.
A-6
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Receiver (Analyzer) Specifications
Measurements
B1 Errors: The 9.95238 Gb/s input is monitored for Section level (Regenerator Section) errors by
comparing the received B1 byte to the recomputed BIP-8 parity. The errors are detected and
counted.
B2 Errors: The 9.95238 Gb/s input is monitored for Line (Multiplex Section) errors by
comparing the 192 received B2 bytes to the recomputed BIP-8 x 192 (BIP-24 x 64) parity. The
errors are detected and counted.
B3 Errors: The 9.95238 Gb/s input is monitored for Path level errors of the active channel by
comparing the received B3 byte to the recomputed BIP-8 parity. The errors are detected and
counted.
REI-L/MS-REI: The 9.95238 Gb/s input is monitored for REI-L/MS-REI in the M1 byte. The errors
are detected and counted.
REI-P: The 9.95238 Gb/s input is monitored for REI-P. The errors are detected and counted.
Frame Alignment Sequence Errors (FAS): The last two A1 bytes and the first two A2 bytes (A1,
A1, A2, A2) of the 9.95238 Gb/s input are monitored for errors.
For SDH, B1, B2, B3, MS-REI per G.821 and G.826, unavailability per G.827.
For SONET, B1, B2, B3, REI-L per GR-253-CORE.
Error counts for the following are available through the receiver: Errored Blocks, Errored Seconds,
Severely Errored Seconds, Unavailable Ratio, Unavailable Seconds, Errored Seconds Ratio,
Severely Errored Seconds Ratio, Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds Periods, Background Block
Errors, Background Block Error Ratio, Total Count, Available Errored Blocks, Available Errored
Seconds, Available Background Block Errors, Available Severely Errored Seconds, and BER.
Alarms Detection
LOS: 9.95238 Gb/s input is monitored for the all zeros condition. When the 10 Gb/s signal has been
off for more than 2 microseconds the LOS condition is declared. The LOS alarm will assert no later
than 127 microseconds after receiving the low signal (all zeros) condition.
LOF, SEF: If 4 or more consecutive frames have FAS errors, then SEF is declared and reframing
is attempted. If SEF persists for more than 3 milliseconds, LOF is declared.
AIS-L: The K2 byte is monitored for occurrence of all ones in three least significant bits.
•
•
SONET: If it occurs in five consecutive frames AIS-L is declared.
SDH: If it occurs in three consecutive frames MS-AIS is declared.
RDI-L: The K2 byte is monitored for occurrence of the '110' code in three least significant bits.
•
•
SONET: If it occurs in five consecutive frames RDI-L is declared.
SDH: If it occurs in three consecutive frames MS-RDI is declared.
AIS-P: If the pointer equals 3FF for three to five frames, then AIS-P is declared.
OTS9100 User Manual
A-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
RDI_P: If the G1 bits 5, 6, and 7 do not equal 000 or 001, a RDI-P condition is declared.
REI-P: If the G1 bits 1 through 4 contain the numbers one through eight (binary, 0001 through
1000), a REI-P condition is declared.
Overhead Display
Approximately every 100 milliseconds each byte of the first three STS-1 Transport Overheads
(AU-4) are extracted and displayed. J0 and J1 are extracted and displayed in ASCII string.
Trace-Identifier-Mismatch (TIM) can be declared by comparing against a user-defined trace.
A-8
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Transmitter Input and Output Specifications
OTS91L4-15, OTS91L5-15 Signal Name: 9.95238 Gb/s Optical Output Data
Signal Rate: 9.95238 Gb/s 100ppm
Pulse Mask Compliance: GR-253 (SONET), G.957 (SDH)
Data Format: PN7 scrambled NRZ formatted data; in BERT mode, unframed and unscrambled
PRBS data
Wavelength: 1550 nm 6 nm
Average Power: ≥+3 dBm (minimum), +5 dBm (typical)
Extinction Ratio: ≥10 dB (minimum), 12 dB (typical)
Wavelength Aging Drift: +\- 0.01nm/yr
Sidemode Suppression: >30 dB
Chirp: α = 0 (nominal)
Optical Return Loss: > 30dB (minimum)
Eye Crossing: 50% (typical)
Connector: FC/PC (standard), SC or ST available
Optical Rise and Fall Time: ≤30 ps at 20%-80%
Optical Extinction for Continuos LOS insertion: > 30 dB
This output can be “locked out” for safety (as UL safety requirements specify) using the front panel
key switch or remote interlock.
Fiber Type: Single Mode
Modulator Type: Mach Zender/Lithium Niobate
Description: Primary output to device under test
OTS91L7, OTS91L8 Signal Name: 9.95238 Gb/s Optical Input
Wavelength: 1528 nm - 1565 nm
Average Power: 0dBm - +16dBm
Insertion Loss: < 7.5dB, 6.0dB typical
NOTE: There is a 3dB reduction in measured power with a 50% duty cycle modulated signal.
Optical Source Polarization Extinction: >14dB
Connector: FC/PC (standard), SC or ST available
Fiber Type: Input – Polarization-maintaining (PM) Panda type
Description: Optical input for external optical source
OTS9100 User Manual
A-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
OTS91L7, OTS91L8 Signal Name: 9.95238 Gb/s Optical Output Data
Signal Rate: 9.95238 Gb/s 100ppm
Pulse Mask Compliance: GR-253 (SONET), G.957 (SDH)
Data Format: PN7 scrambled NRZ formatted data; in BERT mode, unframed and unscrambled
PRBS data
Wavelength: 1528 nm - 1565 nm (Determined by user-supplied external optical source)
Average Power: NA (Determined by user supplied external optical source)
Extinction Ratio: ≥10 dB (minimum), 12 dB (typical)
Wavelength Aging Drift: NA (Determined by user-supplied external optical source)
Sidemode Suppression: NA (Determined by user-supplied external optical source)
Chirp: α = 0(nominal)
Optical Return Loss: > 30dB (minimum)
Eye Crossing: 50% (typical)
Connector: FC/PC (standard), SC or ST available
Optical Rise and Fall Time: ≤30 ps at 20%-80%
Optical Extinction for Continuos LOS insertion: > 30 dB
Remote interlock and key switch: NA (Should be located on user supplied external optical source)
Fiber Type: Output-Single Mode
Modulator Type: Mach Zender/Lithium Niobate
Description: Primary output to device under test
A-10
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
OTS91L4-13, OTS91L5-13 Signal Name: 9.95238 Gb/s Optical Output Data
Signal Rate: 9.95238 Gb/s 100ppm
Pulse Mask Compliance: GR-253 (SONET), G.957 (SDH)
Data Format: PN7 scrambled NRZ formatted data; in BERT mode, unframed and unscrambled
PRBS data
Wavelength: 1310 nm 20 nm
Average Power: -4 dBm (minimum) to +0 dBm , -1 dBm (typical)
Extinction Ratio: >8.2 dB , >9.0 dB (typical)
Sidemode Suppression: > 30dB
Optical Isolation: ≥ 25 dB
Eye Crossing: 50% (typical)
Connector: FC/PC (standard), SC or ST available
Optical Rise and Fall Time: ≤35 ps at 20%-80%
Optical Extinction for Continuos LOS insertion: > 30 dB
This output can be “locked out” for safety (as UL safety requirements specify) using the front panel
key switch or remote interlock.
Fiber Type: Single Mode
Modulator Type: Electro-Absorption
Description: Primary output to device under test
Frame Sync Output
Connector: SMA
External Termination: 50Ω, DC coupled
Voltage Output LOW: : 0.5V ≥ Vol ≥ 0.1V
Voltage Output HIGH: 1.3V ≥ Voh ≥ 0.9V
Symmetry: 55/45% (nominal)
Description: DC coupled, 8 KHz output used for monitoring 10 Gb/s data output.
Event Trigger Output
Connector: SMA
External Termination: 50Ω, DC coupled
Voltage Output LOW: 0.8V ≥ Vol ≥ 0.0V
Voltage Output HIGH: 3.8V ≥ Voh ≥ 1.7V
Pulse Width: 25.7 ns (nominal)
Description: User specified to be asserted (active HIGH) for each generated Alarm or Error.
OTS9100 User Manual
A-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
622 MHz Trigger Output
Connector: SMA
External Termination: 50Ω, AC coupled
Voltage Level: 500 mVpp
Frequency: 622.08 MHz
Description: Signal provided as a scope trigger for viewing data eye diagrams. This sub-rate clock is
derived from the Line Clock.
External 155.52 MHz Clock Input
Connector: SMA
Internal Termination: 50Ω, AC coupled
Voltage Level: 800 mVpp 200 mVpp
Frequency: 155.52 MHz 150ppm
Description: Provides a means to synchronize the transmit system to a user supplied reference.
Transmitter Data Output (Electrical)
Connector: SMA
External Termination: 50Ω, DC coupled
Voltage Output LOW: 0.00V ≥ Vol ≥ -0.10V
Voltage Output HIGH: -0.45V ≥ Voh ≥ -0.60V
Description: Provides the 10 Gb/s data signal. Typically connected to TX DATA IN on the Optics
card.
10 GHz Clock Input
Connector: SMA
Internal Termination: 50Ω, AC coupled
Voltage Level: 800 mVpp (nominal)
Frequency: 9.95328 GHz 150ppm
Description: Provides the Bit rate clock for the transmitter data output. This input is connected to
the 10 Ghz Clock OUT of the Clock Trigger card (OTS91C3).
10 GHz Trigger Output
A-12
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Connector: SMA
External Termination: 50Ω, DC coupled
Voltage Level: 0.0 Vdc, 800 mVpp (nominal)
Frequency: 9.95238 GHz
Description: Provides a copy of the 10 GHz Clock OUT which may be used for a scope trigger.
RX Clock Input
Connector: SMA
Internal Termination: 50Ω, AC coupled
Voltage Level: 800 mVpp (nominal)
Frequency: 155.52 MHz +/- 150 ppm
Description: Signal is used by the PLL to lock the transmitter data output to recovered clock. Used
for through mode or recovered timing when selected.
10 GHz Clock Output
Connector: SMA
External Termination: 50Ω, AC coupled
Voltage Output: 2.19 +/- 0.41 Vpp, 0.0 Vdc (10.6dbm +/- 1.6db)
Frequency: 9.95328 GHz +/- 150 ppm
Description: Bit rate clock for transmitter data output. This output is connected to the 10GHz Clock
IN of the Transmit card.
OTS9100 User Manual
A-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Receiver Input and Output Specifications
OTS91L4, OTS91L6, OTS91L7 Signal Name: 9.95238 Gb/s Optical Input Data
Signal Rate: 9.95238 Gb/s 100ppm
Connector: FC/PC (standard), ST or SC available
Wavelength: 1290nm to 1565nm
Maximum Input Power:0 dBm
Input Power Range: -17 dBm to -2dBm at 1525 nm - 1565 nm, BER <10 -12
-16 dBm to -2 dBm at 1290 nm - 1330 nm, BER< 10 -12
Input Reflectance: < -27 dB
Jitter Tolerance: meets limits for OC-192c and SMT-64c network interface specifications
per (GR-1377-CORE, Issue 5, 12/98) and G.825 (2/99).
Description: Primary optical input from device under test
Event Trigger Output
Connector: SMA
External Termination: 50Ω, DC coupled
Voltage Output LOW: 0.8V ≥ Vol ≥ 0.0V
Voltage Output HIGH: 3.8V ≥ Voh ≥ 1.7V
Pulse Width: 25.7 ns (nominal)
Description: User specified to be asserted (active HIGH) for each generated Alarm or Error.
RX Clock Output
Connector: SMA
External Termination: 50Ω, DC Coupled
Voltage Output LOW: 0.80 V +/- 0.20 V
Description: Used for Transceiver supporting through-mode.
RX Data Input
Connector: SMA
Internal Termination: 50Ω, DC coupled
Voltage Level: 1 Vpp (typical)
Frequency: 9.95238 GB/s Data
Description: Electrical Data signal from the Optics card.
A-14
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Module Interconnect Specifications
Signal Name: Tx Data Out / Tx Data In
Connector: SMA
Voltage Level: 0.5 Vpp (typical)
Description: Electrical data signal. Connect Tx DATA OUT (Transmit card) to Tx DATA IN
(Optics card) with Tektronix supplied cable accessories
Signal Name: Rx Data Out / Rx Data In
Connector: SMA
Voltage Level: 0.70 Vpp (typical)
Description: Electrical data signal. Connect Rx DATA OUT (Optics card) to Rx DATA IN
(Receive card) with Tektronix supplied cable accessories (SMA-SMA coax and DC-Block).
Signal Name: Rx Data Out / 10GHz/s Data In
Connector: SMA
Voltage Level: 0.70 Vpp (typical)
Description: Electrical data signal. Connect Rx DATA OUT (Optics card) to 10GHz/s DATA IN
(Jitter Clock Receive Card) with Tektronix supplied cable accessories (SMA-SMA coax).
Otherwise, terminate Rx DATA OUT with 50Ω.
Signal Name: Rx Clock Out / Rx Clock In
Connector: SMA
Voltage Level: 0.8Vpp (typical)
Description: Clock signal. Connect Rx CLK OUT (Receive card) to Rx CLK IN (Sync card) with
Tektronix supplied cable accessory (SMA-SMA coax).
OTS9100 User Manual
A-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Certifications and Compliance
Laser Safety
The lasers in the OTS9100 module comply with the following:
ꢀ U.S. Class IIIb per 21 CFR 1040
ꢀ European Class 3A per IEC 60825-1
CE Mark Compliance
EMC Compliance Directive
OTS9100 Series 10 Gb/s SONET/SDH Test Module using the OTS9000 Optical Test System
meets the essential requirements per Article 10 of Directive 89/336/EEC for Electromagnetic
Compatibility using the Technical Construction File (TCF) Route.
Competent Body issuing Certificate of Conformity: TÜV Product Service
Listing of Harmonized Standards applied:
EN 55022 Class A
EN 61000-3-2
Radiated and Conducted Emissions
Quasi-stationary Current Harmonics
EN 61326: 1997
IEC 1000-4-2
IEC 1000-4-3
IEC 1000-4-4
IEC 1000-4-5
IEC 1000-4-6
IEC 1000-4-11
Immunity
ESD Immunity Performance Criterion B1
Radiated Immunity Performance Criterion A1
EFT Burst Immunity Performance Criterion B1
Fast Surge Immunity Performance Criterion B1
Conducted Immunity Performance Criterion A1
Voltage Interruptions Performance Criterion B1
1 Specified by EN 61326
Conditions:
ꢀ Requires the following option - OTS9000 Option E1
ꢀ Equipment must be installed within a proximity of no less than 70m to any radio
service to minimize possible interference. If interference is unavoidable, further
actions may be required. Contact Tektronix for consultation.
OTS9100 Series 10Gb/s SONET/SDH Test Module using the OTS9010 or OTS9040 Optical
Test System meets the intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility for all
modules with serial number B000300 or higher.
A-16
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Optical1Card Front Panel Descriptions
10 Gb/s TRANSCEIVER OPTICS CARD
(L4-15, L4-13)
The 10Gb/s Optical Transceiver card performs both E/O and O/E
conversions for the OTS system. It is available with two laser options,
1310nm or 1550nm. The 1310nm Optical Transceiver consists of a
1310nm laser combined with a broadband Receiver. The 1550nm
Optical Transceiver consists of a 1550nm laser combined with a
broadband Receiver. The Optics transceiver card works in conjunction
with the Transmit card which contains all of the transmit functionality
for the OTS system. The Optics transceiver card also works in
conjunction with the Receive card, which contains all of the receiver
functionality and analysis capability for the OTS system.
Figure B-1 shows the Transceiver Optics card front panels.
Module OK
The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is running.
On power up, the LED first lights red, then changes to green when the
system has finished initializing.
NOTE: If the LED remains red after the system has finished initializing
or fails to light at all, call Tek service.
Optical OUT
The Optical Output emits an optical data signal at a wavelength of
1310nm or 1550nm. The optical connector can be configured with field
interchangeable shells; FC (standard), ST, or SC type. The field
interchangeable shells are easily removed to allow easy cleaning of the
connector interface.
The LED found above the Optical OUT heading flashes amber for five
seconds and turns green when the laser is actived.
NOTE: If the LED flashes red, continues to flash amber, or fails to
light at all, call Tektronix for service.
WARNING: Always avoid exposure to the laser beam. Before power
is applied to the OTS9100 system, be sure that all laser outputs are
either covered with the screw cap provided or connected to
the appropriate circuit.
Figure B-1: Transceiver
Front Panels
OTS9100 User Manual
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions
Tx Data IN
Tx Data Input allows electrical data signals to be applied to the optical
transmitter. This input must be connected to the Tx Data Out port found
on the OTS91Tn Transmitter card of the OTS9100 system using the coax
cable provided.
Laser Lockout, Remote Interlock
REMOTE INTERLOCK is a bantam plug normally closed connection
internally wired in series with the laser lockout key switch. It can be
used with additional hardware to disable the laser output.
NOTE: If this connection is used, the ferrite bead provided with the
module must be attached to the remote interlock cable for lower
emissions and CE mark conformance. Install the bead close to the
end of the cable connected to the Optics card.
Laser LOCKOUT is a safety device. The key switch disables the laser
output when it is turned to the “open lock” position. The laser output
can only be turned on when the key is in the “closed lock” position.
NOTE: The laser output cannot be enabled unless:
1. The Laser Lockout key switch is set to the “open lock” or on
position.
2. The Remote Interlock is either not used or externally enabled.
3. The Laser output is software enabled.
NOTE: Optical cables use and care.
1. When using the optical cables ensure that the cable is firmly
seated in the front panel connector. The optical connectors on the
front panel are keyed. If the cable is not inserted into the
connector key properly, the connection between cable and front
panel will not be complete and so will cause errors in transmission
and receiver functions.
2. Always be sure to clean both cable connectors and front panel
connectors before installing optical cables. A dirty optical
connection can cause errors in transmission and receiver
functions.
B-2
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions
Optical IN
The Optical IN port accepts the incoming optical signal to the receiver.
This input signal must have a wavelength between 1290 nm and 1565
nm and must not exceed 0dBm of power.
The LED labeled SIG PRES above the OPTICAL IN heading will turn
green when the Optics card detects an incoming signal. Flashing Red
indicates an optical loss of signal (LOS) condition, and flashing amber
indicates an optical overload condition.
WARNING: The incoming signal must be attenuated to within specified
power levels. If the signal exceeds 0 dBm, damage may occur.
Rx DATA OUT
Rx DATA OUT provides signal interconnection between the system
cards.
This output must be connected to the Rx DATA IN port found on the
Receive card of the OTS9100 system using the coax cable and DC block
provided.
Rx DATA OUT
Rx DATA OUT is a 10Gb/s DATA Signal provided for jitter
measurement.
This output must be connected to the 10 Gb/s DATA IN port found on
the OTS92H1 Clock Receiver Card using the coax cable provided (no
DC block is necessary). Otherwise, this output is normally terminated
with 50Ω.
OTS9100 User Manual
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions
10 Gb/s TRANSMIT-ONLY OPTICS CARD
(L5-15, L5-13)
The 10Gb/s Optical Transmit-only card is available with two laser
options:
1310 nm or 1550 nm. This Optics card performs E/O conversion and
works in conjunction with the Transmit card, which contains transmitter
functionality for the OTS9100 system.
Figure B-2 shows the Transmitter Optics card front panels.
Module OK
The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is running.
On power up, the LED first lights red, then changes to green when the
system has finished initializing.
NOTE: If the LED remains red after the system has finished initializing
or fails to light at all, call Tek service.
Optical OUT
The Optical Output emits an optical data signal at a wavelength of 1310
nm or 1550 nm, with the proper option. The optical connector can be
configured with field interchangeable shells: FC(standard), ST, or SC
type. The field interchangeable shells are easily removed to allow easy
cleaning of the connector interface.
The LED located above the Optical OUT heading will flash amber for
five seconds and then turn green when the laser is activated.
NOTE: If the LED flashes red, continues to flash amber, or fails to light
at all, call Tektronix for service.
WARNING: Always avoid exposure to the laser beam. Before power
is applied to the OTS9100 system, be sure that all laser outputs are
either covered with the screw cap provided or connected to
the appropriate circuit.
Figure B-2:
Transmitter Front Panels
2-4
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions
Tx Data IN
Tx Data Input allows electrical data signals to be applied to the optical
transmitter. This input must be connected to the Tx Data Out port found
on the OTS91Tn Transmitter card of the OTS9100 system using the
coax cable provided.
Laser Lockout, Remote Interlock
REMOTE INTERLOCK is a bantam plug normally closed connection
internally wired in series with the laser lockout key switch. It can be
used with additional hardware to disable the laser output.
NOTE: If this connection is used, the ferrite bead provided with the
module must be attached to the remote interlock cable for lower
emissions and CE mark conformance. Install the bead close to the
end of the cable connected to the Optics card.
Laser LOCKOUT is a safety device. The key switch disables the laser
output when it is turned to the “open lock” position. The laser output
can only be turned on when the key is in the “closed lock” position.
NOTE: The laser output cannot be enabled unless:
The Laser Lockout key switch is set to the “open lock” or on position.
The Remote Interlock is either not used or externally enabled.
The Laser output is software enabled.
1. NOTE: Optical cables use and care. When using the optical
cables ensure that the cable is firmly seated in the front panel
connector. The optical connectors on the front panel are keyed.
If the cable is not inserted into the connector key properly, the
connection between cable and front panel will not be complete
and so will cause errors in transmission and receiver functions.
2. Always be sure to clean both cable connectors and front panel
connectors before installing optical cables. A dirty optical
connection can cause errors in transmission and receiver
functions.
OTS9100 User Manual
B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions
10Gb/s OPTICAL RECEIVE-ONLY (L6)
The 10Gb/s Optical Receive-only card performs the O/E conversion for
the OTS system. This Optics card works in conjunction with the
Receive card which contains all of the receiver functionality and
analysis capability for the OTS system.
Figure B-3 shows the Receiver Optics card front panel.
Module OK
The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is running.
On power up, the LED first lights red and then changes to green when
the system has finished initializing.
NOTE: If the LED remains red after the system has finished initializing,
call Tektronix for service.
Optical IN
The Optical IN port accepts the receiver’s incoming optical signal. This
input signal must have a wavelength between 1290 nm and 1565 nm and
must not exceed 0 dBm of power.
The LED labeled SIG PRES above the OPTICAL IN heading will turn
green when the Optics card detects an incoming signal. Flashing Red
indicates an optical loss of signal (LOS) condition, and flashing amber
indicates an optical overload condition.
WARNING: The incoming signal must be attenuated to within specified
power levels. If the signal exceeds 0 dBm, damage may occur.
Rx DATA OUT
Rx DATA OUT provides signal interconnection between the system
cards.
This output must be connected to the Rx DATA IN port found on the
Receive card of the OTS9100 system using the coax cable and DC block
provided.
Rx DATA OUT
Rx DATA OUT is a 10Gb/s DATA Signal provided for jitter
measurement. This output must be connected to the 10 Gb/s DATA IN
port found on the OTS92H1 Clock Receiver Card using the coax cable
provided (no DC block is necessary). Otherwise, this output is normally
terminated with 50Ω.
Figure B-3
Receive Only Front Panel
2-6
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions
10Gb/s OPTICAL TRANSCEIVER INTERFACE /
EXTERNAL LASER (L7)
The10Gb/s External Laser Transceiver card performs both E/O and O/E
conversions for the OTS system. This card contains both an external laser
interface for the OTS9100 system and a broadband optical receiver. The
L7 Optics card works in conjunction with the Transmit card, which
contains all of the transmitter functionality for the OTS system. The L7
Optics transceiver also works in conjunction with the Receive card,
which contains all of the receiver functionality and analysis capability for
the OTS system.
Figure B-4 shows the External Laser Transceiver card front panel.
Module OK
The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is running.
On power up, the LED first lights red, then changes to green when the
system has finished initializing.
NOTE: If the LED remains red after the system has finished initializing
or fails to light at all, call Tek service.
Optical OUT
The Optical Output is a modulated version of the External Laser Optical
Input. The optical connector can be configured with field
interchangeable shells: FC (standard), ST, or SC type. The field
interchangeable shells are easily removed to allow cleaning of the optical
connector.
The LED found above the Optical OUT heading will flash amber for five
seconds and then change to green when both the optical output is
activated and the external laser is active. The LED may also be green if
the external laser is active, even if the optical output has not been
enabled.
NOTE: If the LED flashes red, continues to flash amber, or fails to light
at all, call Tektronix for service.
WARNING: Always avoid exposure to the laser beam.
Before power is applied to the OTS9100 system, be sure that all
laser outputs are either covered with the screw cap provided or
connected to the appropriate circuit.
Figure B-4.
Transceiver Interface
with External Laser
Front Panel
OTS9100 User Manual
B-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions
External Laser IN
The External Laser In provides interconnection for external fixed or
tunable wavelength laser sources. The input will accept OTS Tunable
lasers or customer supplied lasers that meet specifications. A
polarization-maintaining (PM) jumper and an optical source with good
polarization extinction are required.
As with the Optical Output, the Tx optical input connector can be
configured with field interchangeable shells.
Tx Data IN
Tx Data Input provides signal interconnection between the system cards.
This input must be connected to the Tx Data Out port found on the
Transmit card of the OTS9100 system using the coax cable provided.
Optical IN
The Optical IN port accepts the incoming optical signal to the receiver.
This input signal must have a wavelength between 1290 nm and 1565
nm and must not exceed 0dBm of power.
The LED labeled SIG PRES above the OPTICAL IN heading will turn
green when the Optics card detects an incoming signal. Flashing Red
indicates an optical loss of signal (LOS) condition, and flashing amber
indicates an optical overload condition.
WARNING: The incoming signal must be attenuated to within specified
power levels. If the signal exceeds 0 dBm, damage may occur.
Rx DATA OUT
Rx DATA OUT provides signal interconnection between the system
cards.
This output must be connected to the Rx DATA IN port found on the
Receive card of the OTS9100 system using the coax cable and DC block
provided.
Rx DATA OUT
Rx DATA OUT is a 10Gb/s DATA Signal provided for jitter
measurement. This output must be connected to the 10 Gb/s DATA IN
port found on the OTS92H1 Clock Receiver Card using the coax cable
provided (no DC block is necessary). Otherwise, this output is normally
terminated with 50Ω.
2-8
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions
10Gb/s OPTICALTRANSMIT ONLY/ EXTERNAL
LASER (L8)
The 10Gb/s Transmit-only card Optics card with external laser provides
an external laser interface for the OTS9100 system. This L8 Optics card
provides E/O conversion and works in conjunction with the Transmit
card, which contains transmitter functionality for the OTS9100 system.
Figure B-5 shows the Optical Transmitter card front panel.
Module OK
The Module OK LED should be green while the instrument is running.
On power up, the LED first lights red, then changes to green when the
system has finished initializing.
NOTE: If the LED remains red after the system has finished
initializing or fails to light at all, call Tek service.
Optical OUT
The Optical Output is a modulated version of the External Laser Optical
Input. The optical connector can be configured with field
interchangeable shells: FC (standard), ST, or SC type. The field
interchangeable shells are easily removed to allow cleaning of the optical
connector.
The LED found above the Optical OUT heading will flash amber for five
seconds and then change to green when both the optical output is
activated and the external laser is active. The LED may also be green if
the external laser is active, even if the optical output has not been
enabled.
NOTE: If the LED flashes red, continues to flash amber, or fails to light
at all, call Tektronix for service.
WARNING: Always avoid exposure to the laser beam.
Before power is applied to the OTS9100 system, be sure that all
laser outputs are either covered with the screw cap provided or
connected to the appropriate circuit.
Figure B-5.
Transmit Only External
Laser Front Panel
OTS9100 User Manual
B-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optical Card Front Panel Descriptions
External Laser IN
The External Laser In port provides interconnection for external fixed or
tunable wavelength laser sources. The connection will accept OTS
Tunable lasers or customer supplied lasers that meet specifications. A
polarization-maintaining (PM) jumper and an optical source with good
polarization extinction are required. As with the Optical Output, the Tx
optical input connector can be configured with field interchangeable
shells.
Tx Data IN
Tx Data Input provides signal interconnection between the system cards.
This input must be connected to the Tx Data Out port found on the Transmit
card of the OTS9100 system using the coax cable provided.
2-10
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency Startup Disk
These instructions explain how to make an emergency startup disk for your OTS system.
It is recommended that you take the time to do this procedure every time you change your system
configuration (such as modifying the network settings). The process takes less than five
minutes.
Accessing Help Files
The procedure for making an emergency startup disk is located in the Windows Help files.
Follow the steps below to access these files and create the emergency disk. You will need a
blank floppy disk for the procedure.
NOTE: Make sure you are on the correct OTS system before making the emergency disk.
Because of licensing information, an emergency startup disk must be made for each system.
1. Click on the Start menu and select Help.
2. In the Help dialog box, select the Index tab and type in “Emergency”.
3. The following dialog box is displayed. Click on the button as prompted to begin making the
emergency disk.
OTS9100 User Manual
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency Startup Disk
4. The Repair Disk Utility box is now displayed. In this box you may update the repair
information, create the repair disk, exit, or request additional help. Click Create Repair Disk.
5. The computer then prompts you to label the floppy disk and insert it into your floppy disk drive.
Click on OK to continue.
6. The computer now creates your emergency disk. The computer erases the disk and then
copies the pertinent files onto it.
7. When the computer finishes, it will prompt you with a final message. Exit the repair disk utility
and remove your floppy disk. Be sure to store it in a safe location.
C-2
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Acronyms
AIS-L
AMI
ANSI
ASCII
BBE
BER
BIP
Line Alarm Indication Signal
Alternate Mark Inversion
American National Standards Institute
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
Background Block Error
Bit Error Ratio
Bit Interleaved Parity
BIP-8
CFR
CSES
CV
Bit Interleaved Parity-8
Code of Federal Regulations
Consecutive Severely Errored Second
Coding Violation
EB
Errored Block
ES
Errored Second
ESA
ESB
FAS
IEC
Errored Second Type A
Errored Second Type B
Frame Alignment Signal
International Electrotechnical Commission
International Telecommunications Union
J0 Trace Identifier Marker
Loss of Frame
ITU
J0 TIM
LOF
LOS
MS
Loss of Signal
Multiplex Section
MS AIS
MS RDI
MS REI
NE
Multiplex Section Alarm Indication Signal
Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication
Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication
Network Element
OC
Optical Carrier
OC-N
OOF
OS
Optical Carrier level N
Out of Frame
Operating System
RAI
Remote Alarm Indication
OTS9100 User Manual
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Acronyms
RAI-L
RDI
Line Remote Alarm Indication
Remote Defect Indication
Line Remote Defect Indication
Remote Error Indication
Line Remote Error Indication
Regenerator Section
RDI-L
REI
REI-L
RS
Rx
Receiver
SCPI
SDH
SES
Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Severely Errored Second
Synchronous Optical Network
Synchronous Payload Envelope
Synchronous Transport Signal
Synchronous Transport Signal level N
Trace Identifier Mismatch
Transport Overhead
SONET
SPE
STS
STS-N
TIM
TOH
TU
Tributary Unit
TUG
Tx
Tributary Unit Group
Transmitter
UAS
VC
Unavailable Second
Virtual Container
VT
Virtual Tributary
D-2
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Module Card Replacement
Replacement parts are available from or through your local Tektronix, Inc. service center or
representative. For further information or module replacement, inquiries may be directed to the
Service Call Center at (800) 833-9200.
The OTS9100 is serviced by module replacement. If a faulty module card is detected, use the
following table to determine the necessary replacement card part number. Please have this
number available when inquiring with your Tektronix representative.
Tektronix Part Number
672-1609-00
672-1688-00
672-1606-00
672-1608-00
672-1607-00
672-1705-00
672-1706-00
672-1707-00
672-1708-00
672-1709-00
672-1710-00
672-1711-00
672-1604-00
672-1647-00
672-1605-00
672-1646-00
672-1689-00
Description
OTS91C1 Clock Trig card
OTS91C3 Clock Trig card
OTS91L1 Tx/Rx Optics card
OTS91L2 Tx Optics card
OTS91L3 Rx Optics card
OTS91L413 Tx/Rx Optics card - 1310 nm
OTS91L415 Tx/Rx Optics card - 1550 nm
OTS91L513 Tx Optics card - 1310 nm
OTS91L515 Tx Optics card - 1550 nm
OTS91L6 Rx Optics card
OTS91L7 External Tx/Rx Optics card
OTS91L8 External Tx Optics card
OTS91R1 Receive card
OTS91R2 Receive card
OTS91T1 Transmit card
OTS91T2 Transmit card
OTS91T3 Transmit card
OTS9100 User Manual
E-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Module Card Replacement
E-2
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the Software
These instructions explain how to load the software. The OTS90x0 system is shipped with the
software pre-loaded. This procedure should only be required if the software is accidentally
wiped off the hard drive or if you receive a system software upgrade.
NOTE: The installation software will first remove any previous versions of the OTS90x0 system
software prior to loading the new version. Since this involved a restarting the computer, it is
recommended that all programs be closed prior to performing the installation.
1. Remove the OTS90x0 CDrom from its case and place the CDrom into the OTS90x0 CDrom
drive.
2. The CDrom setup program should start automatically. If it does not, click Start, Run, and type
in “<CDrom drive letter>:\setup.exe”.
3. Follow the prompts to install the new version of the software.
4. When the software is finished loading, remove the CDrom and place it in its case.
OTS9100 User Manual
F-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the Software
F-2
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G
Appendix
Illustrations of cabled OTS9100 module
This appendix provides examples of cabling the OTS9100 module.
The examples provide a reference for location and recommended cable lengths used to configure
the OTS9100 module.
Cabling OTS9100 Module with OTS91L4 Optical Card
OTS9100 User Manual
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G
Cabling OTS9100 Module to OTS9261 Tunable Laser
G-2
OTS9100 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
ANSI/IEEE Standard 488.2 3-6
APS · 1-27
Arranging Windows 2-46
Attaching to the Device to be tested · 1-20
1
128MB RAM Upgrade · 1-7
155Mb/s IN 2-11
B
155MHz Clock Out 2-10
10 GHz Jitter · 1-1
B1 2-18,48,50,51,53
Back plane · 4, 8
Band limiting ·1- 1
BITS · 1-4
Blanking panel · 1-6,7
By Device · 1-20
10Gb/s DATA IN · 1-12, 16, 2-7
10Gb/s Jitter · 1-2, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19
10Gb/s Jitter Testing · 1-11
10GHz CLOCK IN · 1-11, 12, 16, 2-2
10GHz CLOCK OUT 1-11, 12, 16
10GHz JITTER CLOCK OUT · 1-12, 2-9
C
2
Chaining Commands 3-12
Clean up process 2-42
2.5GHz Jitter A Clock Out 2-7
2.5GHz Jitter B Clock Out 2-7
2.5 Jitter Clock In connector · 1-19, 2-9
2.5Gbs Jitter · 1-2
Client lockout 2-16
Clock ·1- 4, 19, 20, 23
2.5GHz Jitter · 1-1
2.5GHz JITTER A CLOCK OUT · 1-12, 14
2.5GHz JITTER CLOCK IN · 1-12
Clock Recovery 2-1,7,8,10
Coax cable · 1-11, 12, 14, 16
Command Description 3-1,14
Command Format 3-8
2/5/10MHz, 2Mb/s IN 2-11
Compliance · 1-27, 2-31
Compliance Title Bar · 1-27
Configuring exported data 2-54
Connecting to an OTS system 2-45
Controlling Responses 3-11
Cumulative Tab · 1-24, 2-28,29,43,45,46,48,51
Current · 1-24, 25, 26
4
4.25” coaxial cable · 1-6
6
D
622MHz Clock Out 2-5
6.25” coaxial cable · 1-6
DACs · 1-3
DATA OUT ·1- 14
DC blocks · 1-11
8
DC signal block · 1-11, 15
Demodulation Output 2-3
Digital Phase Analysis · 1-1
Digitally time-stamp signal edges · 1-3
Display configuration 2-36
Display Notation 2-35
Distortion ·1-11
8.25” coaxial cable · 1-6
A
DPA · 1-1, 2, 3, 2-2,5
DSPs · 1-3
DWDM · 1-4
Abbreviating commands 3-11
ADCs · 1-3
Air diverter · 1-6
Amplitude · 1-3, 23, 33
Analog noise · 1-1
Analog phase detector · 1-3
Analysis · 1-1, 26
OTS9200 and OTS92S1 User Manual
Index-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Jitter measurements · 1-1, 2, 3-5
Jitter output · 1-1, 23, 30, 31, 32
Jitter Output Receive-Only Testing in Manufacturing · 1-31
Jitter Output Testing · 1-30
E
Edge Density Signal, EDS · 2-4, 9
Emergency Startup Disk · 1-18
Error Active · 2-16
Jitter Receiver · 1-1, 23
Jitter Signal 2-22,23
Event Printer 2-55
Exporting test data to other programs · 2-46
External reference clock · 2-10, 11
Jitter Signal Parameters · 1-11,22
Jitter Test Applications · 1-30
Jitter testing · 1-3, 11, 14, 15
jitter tolerance · 1-1, 33, 34
Jitter Transmitter Setup · 1-22
F
L
FAS · 2-18, 48, 50, 51, 53
Filter bandwidth · 2-23
FPGA · 2-2, 7, 10
Laser Control Bar · 2-15
Laser On · 2-16
LED · 2-2, 5, 7, 10, 15, 17, 18, 19, 20
Lock Status · 2-2, 5, 7, 10
Loop timing · 1-4
LOS · 2-18, 30, 48, 50, 51, 53
Loss of Signal · 2-18, 30
Lower Trace · 2-30
G
Gain error · 1-1
General Rules 3-13
GPS clock · 1-4
GR-253 · 1-2, 4
Low intrinsic noise · 1-1, 2
Lower Trace Parameters · 1-26
M
H
Main Status Bar 2-16
Hex Block Format 3-7
Male to female connector · 1-6
Manufacturing Test · 1-4
History Tab · 1-26, 2-17,28,30,43,45,50,51,53
Hot-swappable · 1-7
Maximum Peak 2-30
Measurement Results · 1-24
Measurement Title bar · 1-24
Module cards · 1-7, 8, 9, 10, 11
Module Interconnection · 1-11
Module Quick Check · 1-19, 27
Multi-module system. · 1-10
Multi-Rate Jitter Configuration · 1-14
Multi-rate jitter testing · 1-14
I
IEEE 488.2 3-1,6
In-service Jitter Monitoring · 1-32
Installation · 1-7
interconnection cables · 1-11
Interconnection diagram for OTS Multi-rate Jitter Testing ·
1-15
Interconnection diagram for OTS Receive-only · 1-17
ITU · 1-2, 4, 28
N
Narrow Band sinusoidal jitter signal · 1-34
Navigation Mode · 2-36, 37
Navigation window · 1-20, 22, 23, 24, 27, 28, 29, 2-15, 21,
25, 28,
Navigation Window · 2-14, 21, 31, 36, 37
Non-Repeating Zero · 2-2
J
Jitter Analyzer 2-1,21
Jitter Analyzer Test Control 3-4
Jitter at a 10Gb/s signal rate · 1-11, 15
Jitter generation · 1-1, 2, 30, 2-1
Jitter Generation ·1- 1, 31
O
Jitter Generator · 1-1
Jitter Hit Seconds · 1-25
OC192 2-2
Opening Files on Local System 2-44
Operation 2-44
Jitter Hit Threshold 2-23
Jitter Hybrid · 1-1, 30
Jitter Hybrid, Rx 2-2
Optical Test System 2-13
Index-2
OTS9200 and OTS92S1 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Optical connectors · 1-9
Receiver Setup 2-23
Optics module card · 1-19, 27, 28
Optional parameters 3-10
OTS modules · 1-2, 4, 10, 19
OTS Product Family · 1-1, 6
OTS9000 ·1- 7, 18, 20
Record Type Codes 2-51
Recovered Clock Out 2-2
Remote Access Setup 2-33
Remote Control Settings 2-33
Reference clock · 1-4
OTS9000 chassis · 1-7
OTS9010 · 1-7
OTS9030 · 1-7
Removing Module Cards · 1-9
Results File Management 2-41,42,44
Results Files 2-41
OTS9100 · 1-1, 11, 15
Results Viewer 2-43, 44,45,46
RMS 2-3
Rx DATA IN · 1-11, 15
Rx DATA OUT · 1-11, 12, 16
OTS91C3 · 1-2, 11, 12, 16, 19, 20
OTS91L1 · 1-11, 12, 16, 19, 20, 30
OTS91R2 · 1-11, 15, 16, 19
OTS91T3 · 1-2, 11, 15, 16, 19, 20
OTS9200 · 1-1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 10, 19, 22, 2-1,2,5,17, 3-4,5
OTS9210 ·1- 11, 15
Rx icons 2-21,28
OTS9210 configuration · 1-11
OTS9210 Jitter module · 1-11
OTS9225 Jitter module · 1-14
OTS92H1 Clock Recovery card · 1-1, 10, 12, 16, 19, 30
OTS92R1 · 1-1, 10, 12, 16, 19, 23, 30, 2-2
OTS92S1 · 1-1, 4, 6, 7, 27, 2-1,10
OTS92T1 · 1-1, 10, 12, 14, 19, 22, 24, 2-5
OTS9300 Multi-rate module 1-1, 14, 27
OTS9300 Multi-rate SONET/SDH module · 1-1
OTS93R1receiver · 1-14, 28
S
SCPI 2-15, 39, 3-1,6,8,11,13
SDH 2-2,5,18,22,35,46,49,50,52
Search 2-30
SEF 2-18
Select Server 2-34,35
Settling time · 1-1, 2, 3
Server (system) 2-36
SETUP menu 2-21
Shutdown and Power Off ·1- 18
SiGe chip · 1-1
OTS93T1 transmitter · 1-14, 27, 28, 29
Output jitter compliance 3-5
Output jitter test ·1- 27, 2-31,32
Signal present 2-10,18
Signal Rate 2-21,22,23,31
Sinusoidal signal · 1-34
Slot Positioning of Modules ·1- 10
Slot Specifiers 3-13
P
Page Title 2-36
Parameter types and formats 3-9
Peak to Peak 2-36
SMA Kit · 1-6
SMA male to BNC female · 1-6
SMA male to BNC male · 1-6
Software · 1-2, 4, 6, 10, 20
SONET/SDH · 1-1, 4, 11, 15, 2-5,18,22,35,46
SONET GR 253 (line) analysis 2-52
SONET GR 253 (section) analysis 2-51
Splitters · 1-11
Status Window 2-18
Stratum 3 internal crystal oscillator ·1- 4
Synchronization · 1-1, 4
Phase · 1-2, 3
Phase modulation · 1-3
Phase-locked loops ·1- 2
PLL 2-2,5
Power On and Software Initialization · 1-18, 20, 27
Power Requirements · 1-9
Power splitter · 1-11, 12, 16, 30
Power splitter · 1-6
Powering Up · 1-20
Synchronization external clocks · 1-4
Printing Results data 2-46
System View 2-38
System Menu 2-41
Syntax 3-1,6,14 to 55
Q
Query format 3-8
T
Tektronix · 1-1, 6, 18
R
Tektronix Meausrement data 2-41
Terminator Cap · 1-6
Test Active 2-16
TEST Control · 1-26, 2-14,15,25,26,27
Test mode 2-26
Through mode · 1-10
Range switching · 1-1, 2
Real time · 1-24, 2-28
RECEIVED DATA IN · 1-14, 2-23
Receiver Configuration · 1-19
OTS9200 and OTS92S1 User Manual
Index-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Time Axis 2-30,31
Timing Source 2-22
Time-stamps · 1-3
Title bar 2-21,36,45
Tolerance · 1-27, 31, 33
Toolbar 2-15
U
Upper Trace Parameters · 1-26, 2-30
User interface · 1-2, 4, 18
User defined 2-32, 2-13 to 19, 21,35,36,39,40,41,43,55
Transfer · 1-27, 34
Transmitter 2-21,22,24
Transmitter Configuration · 1-19
Tx DATA OUT ·1-11, 15
V
View Options 2-35
Viewing Results Files 2-45
Transmitter icon 2-21
W
Windowed · 1-24, 25
Windows 2000 · 1-2, 4, 6, 7, 13,17,18, 40,46,55 to 57
Index-4
OTS9200 and OTS92S1 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|